SlideShare a Scribd company logo
CCNA Voice Quick
Reference

Michael Valentine




ciscopress.com      Your S h o r t Cut t o K n o w l e d g e
As a final exam preparation tool, the CCNA Voice Quick Reference provides a concise review of all objectives on the new IIUC
exam (640-460). This digital Short Cut provides you with detailed, graphical-based information, highlighting only the key
topics in cram-style format.

With this document as your guide, you will review topics on concepts and commands that apply to Cisco Unified
Communications for small and medium-sized businesses. This fact-filled Quick Reference allows you to get all-important
information at a glance, helping you focus your study on areas of weakness and enhancing your memory retention of essential
exam concepts.



About the Author
Mike Valentine has 13 years of experience in the IT field, specializing in network design and installation. He is currently a
Cisco trainer with Skyline Advanced Technology Services and specializes in Cisco Unified Communications, CCNA, and
CCNP classes. His accessible, humorous, and effective teaching style has demystified Cisco for hundreds of students since he
began teaching in 2002. Mike holds a bachelor of arts degree from the University of British Columbia and currently holds the
MCSE: Security, CCNA, CCDA, CCNP, CCVP, IPTX, QoS, CCSI #31461, CIEH, and C T P certifications. He has completed
the CCIE written exam.

Mike was on the development team for the Cisco Unified Communications Architecture and Design official Cisco courseware
and is currently developing custom Unified Communications courseware for Skyline. Mike coauthored the popular CCNA
Exam Cram, second edition, first published in December 2005, as well as the third edition of that volume published in
December 2007.



A b o u t t h e T e c h n i c a l Editor
Denise Donohue, CCIE No. 9566, is manager of Solutions Engineering for ePlus Technology in Maryland. She is responsible
for designing and implementing data and VoIP networks and supporting companies based in the National Capital region. Prior
to this role, she was a systems engineer for the data consulting arm of SBC/AT&T. Denise was a Cisco instructor and course
director for Global Knowledge and did network consulting for many years.

                         © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
C C N A Voice Q u i c k Reference         by Michael Valentine

Introduction

               Introduction
               Voice over IP (VoIP) is no longer an interesting sidebar technology; it is a fact of day-to-day life for millions of people,
               some of whom are not even aware they are using it. Cisco has aggressively pursued the development and deployment of
               its Unified Communications suite of products and can now offer an integrated voice, video, and data solution for any
               business, whether it has just a few employees or a hundred thousand worldwide. The technology is reliable, user friendly,
               and exciting, but it is not simple—and a successful deployment requires that the designers, implementers, and administra-
               tors of a Unified Communications system know what they are doing.
               Training and certification of key staff are strategic components of any business plan to deploy a Unified Communications
               system. Until recently, the training track for Unified Communications went from the C C N A (the Associate-level routing
               and switching certification) straight to C C V P , the Professional-level voice certification. The transition between the certifi-
               cations was difficult for many, because the C C N A did not examine any Unified Communications topics, and the C C V P
               launched directly into advanced V o I P signaling protocols, Unified Communications Manager administration, traditional
               telephony, gateway and gatekeeper configuration, Q o S , and so on—all the while assuming that the student had a firm
               grasp of routing and switching concepts. I have met many good C C N A students who had no telephony or V o I P back-
               ground and consequently had great difficulty in the C C V P program. Likewise, many students with very strong traditional
               telephony experience were quickly lost in the intensive data concepts of the C C V P curriculum. It was clear to me and to
               many of my colleagues that the C C N A was not a good fit as a prerequisite to C C V P .
               All this brings us to some good decisions that were made regarding Cisco Unified Communications training and certifica-
               tion. The C C N A has itself been split into C C E N T and C C N A , with C C N A serving as the foundation to some new and
               specialized certifications at the Associate level. The I I U C curriculum prepares students for the C C N A Voice certification,
               which in turn is a solid preparation for and a much-needed transition to C C V P .




                                    © 2 0 0 8 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
CCNA Voice Quick Reference               by Michael Valentine

Introduction

               P u r p o s e of T h i s G u i d e
               This document serves as a roadmap of the CCNA Voice curriculum and a quick reference for the concepts and commands
               that apply to Cisco Unified Communications for small and medium-size businesses. This document is not a list of all the
               questions you may be asked on the exam, but you can be sure that the exam will touch on all the topics you find here.
               Reviewing this document should help you remember key points and commands you will need to know for the exam.



               W h o Should Read T h i s G u i d e
               Anyone who is preparing to take the CCNA Voice exam will find this guide useful. Some may use it as in introduction,
               and some as a refresher right before their test, some perhaps both. Data networkers who need a quick but complete intro-
               duction to Cisco Unified Communications for a small or medium-size business will find it useful as well. Those of you
               who are getting back into study mode for a C C V P exam may turn to this guide as a refresher, too. Then there are always
               those who simply want to learn something new.

               Whoever you are, welcome and enjoy the text. I hope you find it useful.



               Introduction to Unified Communications
               Today's work environment can be very different from what our parents experienced. The business environment is more
               competitive, with an unrelenting pressure to be more efficient, to react quickly, and to make important decisions instantly.
               Efficiencies can be gained by reducing costs, which in turn increases profit, but significant gains can also be made by
               investing in the business infrastructure so that productivity increases dramatically. Increased productivity means more
               opportunities to profit from a newfound competitive edge. This is known as Return on Investment, or ROI. The goal is to
               maximize the ROI—for every dollar spent, businesses want to see more dollars earned, or at least fewer dollars wasted.




                                   © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
CCNA Voice Quick Reference               by Michael Valentine

Introduction
               One area in which businesses have found ways to improve their ROI is in their communications. The evolution of
               communications from traditional telephony, through cell phones, to smart phones and email, and now to Unified
               Communications, has created opportunities for businesses to access information and get it to workers instantly. Unified
               Communications puts voice, data, and video on a converged single network. This makes monitoring, administering, and
               maintaining the network simpler and more cost effective than if three separate systems existed. Unified Communications
               also puts powerful applications with information-distribution features right where they are needed. Workers today can be
               almost anywhere and can carry out meaningful or even critical tasks anywhere they can get a connection to the converged
               network.
               The next significant feature of a Unified Communications system is that it is easy to scale, adding more users, more loca-
               tions, and even more features. Because the Cisco Unified Communications system is a distributed collection of devices,
               functions, and features that are linked by common protocols, adding a new component is much simpler, and integration of
               the new component's capabilities and features can appear seamless to the people who use the system.

               The components required to create and use such a system are numerous and complex. Cisco has taken significant steps to
               develop, document, release, and support the various components as an integrated system. The next section examines the
               components of a Unified Communications system and introduces the devices and applications that make up the system.




                                   © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
FIGURE 1
The Unified
Communications
Architecture




                 © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
• Infrastructure Layer: This layer refers to the network itself, made up of connected switches, routers, and voice
    gateways. This is the converged network that carries data, voice, and video between users on the system.

  •   Call-Processing Layer: This layer manages the signaling of voice and video calls. When a user picks up the phone
      and dials a number, the call processing agent determines how to route the call, instructs the phones to play dial tone
      or to ring, and records the details of the call for future analysis. The call agent carries out many other functions; it
      can be considered the equivalent of a traditional PBX system, but with many more features.

  • Applications Layer: This layer features elements such as voice mail, call-center applications, billing systems, time-
    card or training systems, and customer resource management applications—to name just some of the many applica-
    tions that can integrate with, draw from, or otherwise complement the Unified Communications systems. Because
    the Unified Communications systems are distributed (meaning not constrained to one box or even one location), the
    applications can be hosted almost anywhere, given appropriate connectivity.

  • Endpoint Layer: This layer includes the parts of the system that the users see, hear, or touch. This includes Cisco
      Unified IP Phones, PCs with software phones, video terminals, or other applications that send and receive informa-
      tion from the Unified Communications system.

The following sections examine the layers in a little more detail.



Infrastructure Layer
At the infrastructure layer, we are building the connections between all the devices that send and receive data, voice, and
video. These include Layer 2 and 3 switches, routers, and voice gateways. Voice gateways are among the most important
components because they provide the connection to the PSTN or other network carriers. One of the critical functions (and
one that is unfortunately often underemphasized in many deployments) is quality of service, or QoS. QoS provides
service guarantees to various types of network traffic, in particular voice and video traffic. Without QoS, you can experi-
ence poor call quality or even failed calls. Infrastructure design and deployment is literally the foundation of the system;




                      © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
if any weaknesses exist here, they will manifest as system failures or unreliability. It is very important to build a solid and
correct foundation. The goal is to achieve 99.999% uptime; achieving that goal takes careful attention and good design.



Call Processing Layer
The call processing layer is chiefly about the call agents. A call agent is not a person; it is an application that looks at the
signaling traffic from devices that place and receive calls, and it determines what to do with the call. A Unified IP Phone
sends a packet to the call agent when you lift the receiver; the call agent instructs the phone to play a dial tone. When you
begin dialing a number to call, the call agent receives the digits and tries to find a match for the number in its dial plan. If
the destination number is a phone that it controls, it tells the called device to ring. During the call, the call agent also sets
up other services, such as Hold, Call Park, Transfer, Conference, and so on. The call agent also instructs the phones to
tear down the call when one party hangs up. The call agent usually keeps detailed records of each call made; these are
commonly used for billing purposes or troubleshooting.

Cisco provides several options for call agents, matched to the size and requirements of the customer:

  •   The Cisco Smart Business Communications System is designed for small businesses with up to 48 users. The system
      runs on the Cisco Unified Communications 500 Series for Small Business devices.

  •   Cisco Unified Communications Manager Express serves up to 240 users and runs on the Integrated Services Router
      platforms.

  •   Cisco Unified Communications Manager Business Edition handles up to 500 users and runs as a standalone installa-
      tion on a 7800-series Media Convergence server.

  •   Cisco Unified Communications Manager can handle 30,000 or more users and runs on clusters of 7800-series Media
      Convergence servers.




                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Smart Business Communications System

FIGURE 2
The Smart Business
Communications
System—Image ©
Cisco




                     The Smart Business Communications System is a group of specially designed, integrated devices that can provide high-
                     quality routing, firewall, intrusion prevention, Power over Ethernet, wireless, and many WAN and PSTN connectivity
                     options. It is essentially a solution-in-a-box, with a simple web-based interface that is largely plug and play. The Unified
                     Communications 500 Series devices are small and inexpensive, providing the kind of connectivity options small busi-
                     nesses need to allow them to take advantage of Unified Communications with a good ROI. The SBCS is expandable
                     using 500-series switches, and the call agent software can support up to 48 phones. Voice mail and Auto-Attendant func-
                     tions are provided by the integrated Cisco Unity Express application.




                                          © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Unified Communication Manager Express

FIGURE 3
Cisco Integrated
Services Routers for
Unified
Communications
Manager Express—
Image © Cisco




                       Cisco Unified Communication Manager Express is a software feature that can run on the ISR-series router platforms,
                       including the 800, 1800, 2800, 3800, and 7200-series platforms. The call agent application is embedded with the Cisco
                       IOS software and is configured either from the command line or a Web-based interface. Unified CM Express is a full-
                       featured call agent that is cost-effective, reliable, and scalable and integrates with both Service Provider connections and
                       Unified Communications Manager clusters. With support for both H.323 and SIP protocols, site-to-site connections are
                       possible in a variety of environments. The Unified CM Express system can be set up either as a PBX or a Key switch
                       system, providing customers with a familiar experience that suits their operating environment.


                       Unified Communications Manager, Business Edition
                       Unified Communications Manager, Business Edition is a standalone installation of the Unified CM application and Cisco
                       Unity Connection, coresident in a single M C S 7800-series appliance. This system can support up to 500 users in a single
                       site or multisite centralized deployment and can be migrated to a full CM cluster if growth necessitates it. Unified CM
                       Business Edition provides medium-size businesses with advanced features such as Mobility (a.k.a. Single Number




                                            © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Reach), Do Not Disturb, Intercom Whisper, and Audible Message Waiting Indication, as well as speech recognition and
integrated messaging. Because Unified CM Business Edition uses the same call agent software as a full cluster deploy-
ment of Unified C M , it supports full integration with the other Unified Communications applications, such as Unified
Presence, Unified Personal Communicator, MeetingPlace Express, Contact Center Express, and so on.


Unified Communications Manager
The full version of Unified Communications Manager is an enterprise-class, fully scalable, redundant, and robust distrib-
uted packet-telephony application. Scalable to 30,000 users per cluster, with the capability to form intercluster connec-
tions, it can support a global unified communications system for hundreds of thousands of endpoints. Unified CM
versions prior to 5.x are Windows based, whereas versions 5.x and 6.x are Linux-based appliances.



Applications Layer
There are effectively a limitless number of applications that can be part of a Unified Communications system, because
third-party applications can be developed to closely integrate with the Cisco suite of products. The following is a list of
the more common applications found in a Unified Communications system:

  •   Voice Mail: Voice mail can be provided using Cisco Unity, Unity Connection, or Unity Express. Unity and Unity
      Connection run on the MCS 7800 series platforms, and Unity Express is a self-contained module that is added to an
      ISR router and administered through the command line and GUI. The maximum mailboxes and recording time
      capacities vary depending on which module (either Advanced Integration Module or Network Module) is installed in
      the router.

  •   Cisco Emergency Responder: This application tracks the location of an IP telephony device based on the physical
      switch port it is connected to. This information is attached to the caller information in the event the device calls 9 1 1 ,
      which in turn allows 911 responders to locate the device (and therefore presumably the emergency) more precisely.
      911 operation in a Unified Communications environment is a major design challenge because a VoIP phone system
      can easily throw out the premise that a PSTN call is placed from the same location as the phone that made it.



                      © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
•   Cisco Unified Contact Center [Express]: This is a call center application with full feature support for advanced
      call distribution, supervision, escalation and logging. Versions are available to support small and large call centers.

  •   Cisco Unified Meeting Place [Express]: This is a full-featured web-conferencing application enabling voice and
      video conferencing as well as document sharing and collaboration, whiteboarding, and conference participant
      management.

  •   Cisco Unified Presence: This extends the native capabilities of Unified CM 6.x+ to indicate presence information.
      The native capability includes on/off hook status in speed dials and call lists, whereas the full applications server
      provides detailed presence information as typically found in chat applications ("On the Phone," "Out to Lunch," "Do
      Not Disturb," and so on).



Endpoints Layer
An increasing variety of Cisco Unified IP Phones (and third-party IP phones) can be part of a Unified Communications
deployment. All Cisco Unified IP Phones provide a display-based user interface, user customization, Power over Ethernet
capability (where appropriate), and support for G.711 and G.729 codecs (and, on some models, Cisco Wideband and/or
iLBC codecs). The following is a partial list and brief description of the Cisco Unified IP Phones available:

Commercial/Retail      Phones
  7931G: 24 programmable buttons, 4-way LEDs, Dedicated HolaVTransfer/Redial buttons


  7921G: Wireless, 2-in. color screen, speakerphone, XML-PTT, longer battery life


Mobility

  7921G: Wireless, 2-in. color screen, speakerphone, XML-PTT, longer battery life

  IP Communicator: Software-based IP Phone, emulates 7970G functionality


                      © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Business      Class
  7940G: B/W LCD, 2-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable

  7941G: Higher resolution B/W LCD, 2-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable

  7960G: B/W LCD, 6-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable

  7961G: Higher resolution B/W LCD, 6-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable

Advanced           Media
  7942G: Hi-fidelity audio, Hi-res display, 2-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable

  7945G: Gig Ethernet, Hi-fidelity audio, Hi-res color display, 2-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable

  7962G: Hi-fidelity audio, Hi-res display, 6-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable

  7965G: Gig Ethernet, Hi-fidelity audio, Hi-res color display, 6-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable

  7975G: Gig Ethernet, Hi-fidelity audio, backlit hi-res color display, 6-button, XML, SIP-capable

Color      Touch
  7970G: Backlit hi-res color touch screen, 8-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable

  7971G-GE: Gig Ethernet, Backlit hi-res color touch screen, 8-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable

  7975G: Hi-fidelity audio, Backlit hi-res color touch screen, 8-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable

Video
  7985G: Personal desktop video phone

  Unified Video Advantage: Software IP Video Phone with support for attached camera

Conference
  7936G: Backlit LCD, 3 softkeys, small-medium conference needs
  7937G: Hi-fidelity audio, extended audio coverage w/ extra mics, large display
                           © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Understanding Unified Communications
Applications
In this section, we examine the variety of applications available for integration in a Unified Communications environ-
ment, including Messaging, Auto Attendant, Interactive Voice Response (IVR), Contact Center, Mobility, and Presence.



Messaging
A variety of messaging options are available to suit the needs of businesses small and large. The following table provides
a summary of the options.
                   Max.                                                                       T D M PBX
Product            Users        Messaging Capability                           Platform       Integration?      Networking?        Redundancy?
Unity Express      250          Voice Mail + Integrated Messaging              ISR            No                Yes                No
Unity Connection   3000         Voice Mail + Integrated Messaging              MCS            Yes               No                 No
Unity              7500         Voice Mail + Integrated Messaging +            MCS            Yes               Yes                Yes
                   per server   Unified Messaging

The following sections describe the messaging products listed in the table in more detail.


Cisco Unity Express
Unity Express is an ISR-based application that runs either on an AIM module or an NM module. AIM modules are
connected to the main board as a daughter board addition and use flash memory for greetings and message storage. AIM
modules therefore have less capacity for storage. NM modules are inserted into module bays in ISR routers, use a hard




                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
disk for greeting and message storage, and have greater capacity for storage than A I M modules. Unity Express supports
from 4 to 16 concurrent sessions and 12 to 250 mailboxes (dependent on the module and platform installed). Unity
Express is managed through the command line or a web-based GUI. It allows users to view and sort their voice messages
using the IP Phone display, email application, or IMAP client. Unity Express can be deployed in conjunction with
Unified CM or CM Express and can supplement a full Unity deployment.


Cisco Unity Connection
Unity Connection is a medium-size business solution with a full range of messaging features. It can be deployed on its
own or as a coresident installation as part of Unified Communications Manager Business Edition on suitable MCS plat-
forms. When deployed as part of CM Business Edition, Unity Connection supports up to 500 users; when deployed as a
standalone application, Unity connection supports up to 3000 users per server (dependent on hardware). Scalability is
achieved by networking up to 10 other Unity messaging products of any type. Fourteen languages are supported for
deployments worldwide. Unity Connection also supports speech recognition, allowing users to speak commands to
manage their messages hands-free. Multiple interfaces are supported for managing messages from an IP Phone, an email
client, a web GUI, or Cisco Unified Personal Communicator. Users can define their own rules to transfer calls based on
caller, time of day, and Microsoft Exchange calendar status.


Cisco Unity
Unity is the enterprise-class messaging application with support for up to 7500 users per server and up to 250,000 users
in a multi server networked environment. Interoperability with legacy voice-mail systems, notably Octel and Nortel
systems, allows a phased transition to IP messaging with minimal disruption to users. Unity supports 35 languages, facili-
tating deployments worldwide. Full unified messaging is possible with connectors for Exchange, Notes, and GroupWise,
providing a single inbox for email, voice mail, and fax messages. Text-to-speech capability allows users to have their
emails read to them over the phone by the RealSpeech engine; speech recognition is also available so users can instruct
Unity to play, search, or record messages hands-free. Secure messaging is supported, allowing encrypted messages and
preventing messages that have expired from being played. Access to messages is made simple, intuitive, and possible
from almost anywhere.



                    © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Auto Attendant
An Auto Attendant is basically an advanced answering machine; instead of only one message, it can play several, depend-
ing on the date and time, which number was called, and most importantly, what numbers the callers pressed in response
to the greeting they heard. If you have ever heard: "For service in English, press I. Pour service en Francais, appuyez sur
le 2 . . . , " you have been served by an Auto Attendant. Typically, Auto Attendants allow callers to select the department or
extension they want to call, and often they allow the caller to spell out a first or last name to search in the company direc-
tory. Cisco Unity, Unity Connection, and Unity Express all provide Auto Attendant functionality; Unity and Unity
Connection include a simple web interface that makes it very easy to construct menus and test to see that they work as
you intended.



Cisco Unified IP IVR
Although Auto Attendants are useful, their functionality is limited to pretty basic menu navigation. To scale this function-
ality up to call-center size, and especially to include speech recognition, prompt-and-collect ("Please enter your 10-digit
account number, followed by the # sign"), Text-to-Speech, database integration, and Java application integration, a much
more advanced IVR application is required. Cisco Unified IP IVR has all these advanced capabilities. Call centers that
have a high call volume and many possible queues of callers waiting for different agent capabilities can effectively deploy
Unified IP IVR to steer callers to the correct agent, or perhaps to an automated information source without the need to tie
up an agent at all. Unified IP IVR includes the capability to provide both real-time and historical reports on its utilization
and offers multiple-language support.



Cisco Unified Customer Voice Portal
For the very largest call centers, the Unified CVP product provides advanced IVR, including speech recognition,
advanced queuing, integration with Cisco Unified Contact Center (Enterprise and Hosted), and powerful call routing,
management, and reporting features.




                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Cisco Unified Contact Center
Cisco provides a range of Contact Center products for S M B , Enterprise, and Service Provider applications. Customer
contact solutions provide multiple avenues to reach and interact with customers, including basic telephony as well as
feature-rich web, email, and even video interaction. The three Contact Center products are described next:

  •   Cisco Unified Contact Center Express: Suitable for 10 to 300 agents, it provides sophisticated call routing,
      outbound dialing capabilities, comprehensive contact management, and chat and web collaboration in a single-
      server, integrated "contact center in a box."

  •   Cisco Unified Contact Center Enterprise: Provides intelligent contact routing, call treatment, network-to-desktop
      computer telephony integration (CTI), and multichannel contact management. It combines multichannel automatic
      call distributor (ACD) functionality. Sophisticated monitoring allows customers to be routed to the most appropriate
      agent (based on real-time conditions such as agent skills, availability, and queue lengths) anywhere in the enterprise,
      regardless of the agent's location.

  •   Cisco Unified Contact Center Hosted: An application hosted by service providers, who then lease its functionality
      to customers who want a virtual contact center without the need to manage and maintain it themselves. Subscribing
      business customers can have IP or time-division multiplexing (TDM) infrastructures or a combination of the two.
      Contact Center Hosted provides all the advanced capabilities found in Contact Center Enterprise.




Cisco Unified Mobile Solutions
Today's workforce is mobile, distributed, and utilizes multiple technologies to communicate. The desire to have a seam-
less transition between the various ways in which people can be reached has spurred the development of mobility features
in Cisco Unified Communications. The key products are the following:

  •   Cisco Unified Mobility: (a.k.a Single Number Reach) Allows multiple remote destinations (commonly a cell phone,
      a home office phone, or other work location) to be configured to ring at the same time as the worker's enterprise



                      © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
desk phone. Thus, when a customer calls your work number while you are on your way to a meeting, your cell
    phone can ring and you can answer without the customer realizing you are away from your desk. Furthermore, if
    you return to your desk, you can simply pick up your desk phone and continue the call.

    A related feature, called Cisco Mobile Voice Access, allows users to place calls from their enterprise desk phone
    from a remote location or a cell phone. By dialing a configured number and entering an access code, the enterprise
    system will prompt for the number you want to call, and the call will be placed as if you were at your desk. This is
    useful not only for presenting the preferred Caller-ID number to the customer, but also potentially for long-distance
    toll savings.

•   Cisco Unified Personal Communicator: A desktop PC (or Mac) application that combines a software IP Phone, IM
    client, video, and online collaboration capabilities. Presence indications ("Busy," "In a call," "Away," "Do Not
    Disturb," and so on) can save time and enhance productivity because users can see the status of the person they want
    to contact before trying to reach them. Integration with an Outlook toolbar provides click-to-call or click-to-chat
    from a message or contact.

•   Cisco Unified IP Communicator: A fully functioned software IP Phone, often characterized as a "7970 under
    glass." Users can place and receive calls from their PCs from anywhere that connectivity to the call agent can be
    established. This is typically achieved through a VPN connection; it is perfectly possible to place a call from an
    airport boarding lounge or your local coffee shop. Unified IP Communicator can be enhanced with Unified Video
    Advantage, which integrates a PC webcam for video calls.

•   Cisco Unified Mobile Communicator: An application for smart mobile phones that provides access to enterprise
    directories, presence indicators, secure text/chat, voice-mail access, call history of any of the user's phones displayed
    on the mobile handset, and collaboration and conferencing integration with Unified Meeting Place.

•   Cisco Unified Presence: A server-based application that extends the on/off hook status monitoring capability of Unified
    CM 6.x to include IM-like status messages. Status indications can be displayed or integrated with Personal Communi-
    cator, Mobile Communicator, IP Phone Messenger, the Microsoft Office Connector, and IBM Sametime Communicator.




                    © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
nified Communications Applications
                      Cisco Telepresence
                      Cisco Telepresence is a state-of-the-art high-definition videoconferencing system. A specially designed system of furniture,
                      cameras, monitors, and microphones creates a life-sized illusion of a meeting whose participants may be half a world apart.
                      With 1080p HD video, CD-quality spatial audio, and high-quality lighting, the experience is dramatic to say the least. In
                      combination with the Telepresence Multipoint Switch, up to 36 locations can be included in a single conference with near-
                      zero latency. This can only be described as a high-end solution, with commensurate demands on bandwidth.

FIGURE 4
The Cisco
Telepresence 3000
System—Image ©
Cisco




                                          © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Understanding Traditional Telephony
                      This section introduces traditional telephony systems, concepts, and applications.



                      The PSTN
FIGURE 5                                           Public Switched Telephone Network
A Representation of
the Public Switched
Telephone Network
(PSTN)




                      The PSTN, or Public Switched Telephone Network, is made up of Central Office switches to which subscriber lines are
                      connected. The CO switch is programmed so that it knows which phone number (subscriber line) is attached to a particu-
                      lar port. If the number called is not on the local switch, the call is routed over an interoffice trunk to another switch,
                      which may have the called subscriber line connected directly to it or may in turn route the call to other CO switches.
                      Telephone numbering plans are organized so that calls are routed efficiently through the switch system to the correct
                      destination switch.


                                          © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Note that for our purposes, a line connects to a single phone number and supports one call at a time, whereas a trunk
                        interconnects two switches and supports multiple calls at a time.



                        Business Telephony Systems
                        Businesses have more elaborate requirements of the telephone beyond simply placing calls. Over time, two main types of
                        business systems have evolved: the PBX and the Key System. Both have their place, and both offer calling features that
                        make it easier to carry on business both internally and externally with staff, customers, and suppliers.


                        PBX Systems

FIGURE 6
A Representation of a
PBX System




                        Business telephone systems often use a Private Branch Exchange (PBX) switch, usually located in their building. The
                        PBX is configured in much the same way as the PSTN CO switch: it holds the dial plan for all numbers within the busi-
                        ness, and external calls are routed over a CO trunk to the PSTN CO switch if the called number is not on the PBX. As a
                        business grows, it is common to install another PBX in another location or building and set up a special trunk (called a
                        tie-line or tie-trunk) between the PBXs so that calls to the remote location are still internal numbers (typically 4- or 5-
                        digit numbers) instead of PSTN calls.

                        A PBX consists of a control plane (the "brain"), a terminal interface that connects phones to the features they want to use,
                        a switching engine that determines which port to route a call out, line cards to connect to phones, and trunk cards to

                                             © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
CCNA Voice Quick Reference               by Michael Valentine

Understanding Traditional Telephony
                  connect to the PSTN or to tie trunks to other PBXs. PBXs come in a variety of sizes, supporting from 10 to 20,000
                  phones. All PBXs offer basic calling features, with additional advanced features optional based on hardware capability
                  and licensing. These features typically include Hold, Transfer, Conference, Park, Voice Mail, and so forth.

                  Key Systems
                  Smaller businesses will sometimes use a key system. A key system is like a PBX in that it controls a group of local
                  phones, but key systems tend to have fewer features than PBXs. One characteristic of key systems that many businesses
                  specifically request is distributed answering from any phone; that is, all the phones ring at once, and whoever is able to
                  pick up Line 2 (for example) can push the Line 2 button on any phone and take the call. PBXs don't normally do this;
                  they have a central answering point (a receptionist or Auto Attendant) and Direct Inward Dial numbers (DIDs) if needed.



                  Telephony Signaling
                  Telephony signaling refers to the messages that must be sent to set up and tear down a phone call—that is, anything other
                  than the actual voice. Following are the three types of telephony signaling:

                    •   Supervisory: Communicates the current state of the telephony device. There are three types of supervisory signals:

                          •   On-Hook: The phone is hung up. Only the ringer is active in this state. (Note that if the speakerphone button is
                              pressed, this is the same as being off-hook.)

                          •   Off-Hook: The phone receiver is out of the cradle. This signals the phone switch (PSTN, PBX, or Key) that the
                              phone wants to make a call; the switch sends a dial tone to indicate that it is ready to receive digits.

                          • Ringing: The switch sends voltage to the phone to make it ring, alerting the user that there is an inbound call.
                            The other end of the call hears a ringback tone.

                    • Address: Communicates the digits that were dialed. Address signaling is most commonly done using Dual Tone
                      Multi Frequency (DTMF) tones, commonly known as TouchTone dialing. The combination of tones tells the switch
                      what number was pressed. Older systems also support pulse dialing, which is what the old-fashioned rotary dial



                                        © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
CCNA Voice Quick Reference               by Michael Valentine

   Understanding Traditional Telephony
                          phones used. Pulse dialing works by repeatedly opening and closing the circuit to the phone switch; the switch
                          counts the number of pulses and interprets that as the number dialed. You might have seen in really old movies
                          when someone picks up the phone and taps the receiver cradle repeatedly; this was how you got the attention of the
                          operator.
                       • Informational: Communicates the call status to participants in the call. Informational signals include dial tone, ring-
                          back tone, and reorder tone. These tones, and others not mentioned here, will vary from country to country. In
                          England, for example, ringback tone sounds very different from what would be heard in North America.


                     Signaling System 7 (SS7)
                     SS7 is a global telephony standard that allows a phone call to be routed between CO switches, between long-distance
                     carriers, and even between national telephone providers in other countries. SS7's primary role is to complete the setup
                     and teardown of phone calls; this is quite a distinct process from the actual transport of the voice signal. In fact, the call
                     control information in an SS7 network must traverse an entirely separate network from the voice path. The capabilities of
                     SS7 have allowed the introduction of relatively complex value-added services, such as call screening, number portability,
                     and prepaid calling cards.



                     PSTN Call Setup
                     To make a PSTN call, several steps occur that the caller is unaware of. The following steps refer to Figure 7.




                     0
FIGURE 7
PSTN Call Setup




                       Customer
                       Telephone



                                          © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
1. The calling phone goes off-hook, closing the circuit to the local CO switch.

                            2. The local CO switch detects that current is flowing over the closed circuit and sends a dial tone to the calling phone.

                            3. Address signals (DTMF or pulse) are sent as the calling party dials the called number.

                            4. The local CO switch collects the digits and makes its routing decision; in this example, it uses an SS7 lookup to
                               locate the destination CO switch.

                            5. Supervisory signaling indicates to the far-end trunk that a call is inbound.

                            6. The PBX determines which internal line the call should go to and causes the connected phone to ring.

                             7. The ringback tone is heard at the calling party end.

                            8. The called party goes off-hook, and a voice circuit is established end-to-end.

                           The fact that all this happens with very high reliability billions of times every day is pretty impressive. It also provides
                           some insight into how complex it is to duplicate these functions in a VoIP system. More on that later.



                           Numbering Plans
NOTE                       A numbering plan is an organized distribution of telephone numbers administered by a regional or national authority. The
Codes do not always        plan defines the rules that allocate numbers according to an established international telecommunications standard. For
need to be dialed; Local   example, the North American Numbering Plan defines a country code of 1, followed by a three-digit area code, a three-
numbers must always be     digit office code, and a four-digit local number. There are numerous other numbering plans for other countries or regions
dialed.
                           of the world.




                                                © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
The North American Numbering Plan
                             Let's look at the N A N P in more detail. The 10-digit number is made up of the 3-digit area code, the 3-digit office code,
                             and the 4-digit local number, as shown here:

                               NXX-NXX-XXXX

NOTE                         It is very important to note that the " N " represents any digit in the range 2 through 9, and the " X " represents any digit 0
Several other ranges are     through 9. You will never find an office or area code of OXX or 1XX; those numbers are either reserved for specialized
reserved for specialized     purposes or would interfere with things like operator access numbers. Several ranges are also reserved for Easily
purposes. One commonly
                             Recognizable Codes (ERCs); these are numbers where the second and third numbers of the area code are the same. They
recognized one is 555-
                             are used for special services—for example, 800, 888, 877, and 866 are toll-free numbers. Another recognizable assign-
01XX, which is used in
film and TV, demonstra-      ment is the " N i l " series: this includes 4 1 1 , 6 1 1 , and 911 numbers that are not used as area codes but for other special
tions, or education. No      assignments, such as information or emergency services.
actual customer is
assigned these numbers,
so calling a number seen
in a movie will not pose a
                             E.164 Addressing
nuisance to anyone. When     The E.164 addressing scheme is an international standard for telephone numbering plans, originally developed by the
Tommy Tutone recorded        International Telecommunication Union. An E.164 number contains the following components:
"867-5309/Jenny," he
immediately annoyed            CC—Country Code
thousands of phone
                               NDC—National Designation Code
customers worldwide.
                               SN—Subscriber Number

                             An E.164 number is standardized at 15 digits, generating over 100 trillion unique strings. In theory, it's possible to direct
                             dial any conventional phone in the world from any other conventional phone.




                                                  © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Introduction to Analog Circuits
Analog (in contrast to digital) circuits are still the most common telephone connections worldwide. The phone line to a
North American home is most commonly an analog loop circuit, although more and more digital phone services are being
installed. Cisco gateways must connect to various analog services to place calls to the PSTN; the analog circuits that
Cisco supports are Foreign Exchange Station (FXS), Foreign Exchange Office (FXO), and Earth and Magneto (E&M).
This section examines the components of an analog telephone and the signaling methods used by analog circuits.



Components of an Analog Phone
An analog phone includes the following components:

  •   Receiver: The handset speaker

  •   Transmitter: The handset microphone

  • 2-wire/4-wire hybrid: Converts 2-wire from the CO to 4-wire in the phone

  • Dialer (tone/pulse): The dialing keypad or rotary dial

  •   Switch hook: The switch that closes/opens the circuit (off-hook/on-hook)

  •   Ringer: Sounds to indicate inbound call



Foreign Exchange Station
An FXS port connects directly to an analog phone or fax machine. Switches (including CO switches and PBXs) and
Cisco gateways will have FXS ports to connect an analog phone. The switch or FXS gateway port must provide power,
call progress tones, and dial tone to the analog device. An FXS port on a gateway is also the direct connection to the VoIP
network and consequently also contains a coder-decoder (Codec) to convert the analog signal to digital for packetization.
Alternatively, a Cisco Analog Telephony Adapter can serve as a remote FXS-to-Ethernet converter to connect an analog
station to the VoIP network.

                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Foreign Exchange Office
                       An F X O port connects to the PSTN CO switch. If you want to connect your gateway router to the phone company over
                       standard analog lines (that you could plug your analog phone into), you use F X O ports. These ports allow the gateway to
                       place and receive calls to/from the PSTN. FXO ports also include a codec.




FIGURE 8
Loop-Start Signaling




                       Loop-start signaling is commonly associated with local loop circuits (such as an analog line to the PSTN); it is seldom
                       seen on trunk connections. A local loop is a two-wire service that uses very simple electrical signaling; remember that
                       this technology has been in use and substantially unchanged for 100 years!




                                           © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Following is the loop-start process:

 1. A phone that is on-hook breaks the electrical circuit; we say opens the circuit. No electricity can flow because of the
    open circuit.

 2. When the receiver is lifted, the circuit closes and electricity flows. This current is - 4 8 V DC. The CO switch that is
    connected to the local loop detects the current flow and interprets this as an attempt to place a call—we say "seize a
    circuit." The CO switch plays dial tone down the line to the phone as an indication that it is prepared to collect
    digits.

 3. If the phone is on-hook and the CO switch has a call inbound for it, the CO switch applies 90V AC current to the
    open circuit; because it is AC, the current can be applied even on the open circuit. By the way, this is why you
    should not have an analog phone near the bath. The DC voltage won't do much, but you will definitely know it if the
    phone rings and you get zapped by the AC voltage.

     Loop-start works very well for homes or other lightly used circuits, but if it is in constant use, a problem known as
     glare can occur; this refers to both ends of the circuit being seized at the same time, so that you pick up the phone
     and there is a caller on the line at the same moment, by coincidence.



Ground-Start Signaling
Ground-start signaling is an adaptation of loop-start. Instead of the circuit being closed only at the phone end, both ends
of the circuit have the capability to detect current, and both ends can request and confirm the use of the circuit. This is
achieved by both ends being able to ground one of the wires in the circuit. These wires (or leads) are referred to as Tip
and Ring. These terms date back to the use of 1/4-inch jacks with a positive contact at the tip and a negative conductor in
the ring. The advantage is that it makes glare much less likely, and consequently ground-start is appropriate for trunk
connections that are heavily used. However, it is very rare to see a ground-start trunk in a VoIP network or indeed in any
new trunk deployment.




                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
FIGURE 9
Ground-Start
Signaling




               The ground-start process as it occurs on a trunk between a PBX and the CO switch is described next; refer to the diagram
               for each step:

                1. The PBX has a call that it must send to the PSTN. It signals to the CO switch that there is an inbound call by
                   grounding the ring lead.

                2. The CO senses the ring lead as grounded and grounds the tip lead to signal the PBX that it is ready to receive the
                   call.

                3. The PBX senses the tip ground and closes the loop between tip and ring in response; the PBX also removes the ring
                   ground.

                4. The voice circuit is complete, and communication can begin.




                                   © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
E&M Signaling
Variously called "Ear and Mouth," "RecEive and TransMit," and "Earth and Magneto," E & M analog trunks were typi-
cally used to interconnect PBXs (tie-trunks). E & M connections have separate leads for signaling and voice; the signaling
leads are known as the E and M leads.

In an E & M connection, one side is called the trunk side; this is usually the PBX side. The other side is called the
signaling-unit side; this is the CO, channel-bank, or Cisco gateway E & M interface. The E lead is used to indicate to the
trunk side that the signaling-unit side has gone off-hook; conversely, the M lead is used to indicate to the signaling-unit
side that the trunk side has gone off-hook.

Five types of E & M signaling exist, numbered Type I through Type V. In a Cisco Gateway application, Types II and V can
be connected back-to-back and Type I cannot be. Cisco does not support Type IV.

Three main techniques are employed in E & M circuit signaling:

  •   Wink Start: The terminating side (for example, a Cisco Gateway) uses a brief off-hook-on-hook "wink" to
      acknowledge that the originating side (for example, a PBX) has gone off-hook. Upon receipt of the wink, the origi-
      nating side begins sending digits. When the far-end device answers the call, the terminating side goes off-hook and
      the voice circuit is then set up.

  • Immediate Start: The originating side goes off-hook, waits a set time (perhaps 200ms), and then begins sending
    digits whether or not the terminating side is ready.

  • Delay Dial: Assume that a PBX is placing a call outbound to the PSTN: First, the PBX goes off-hook. The CO then
      goes off-hook until it is ready to receive digits; it then goes on-hook. (This time period is the delay dial signal.) The
      PBX sends digits. When the far-end device answers the call, the CO goes off-hook (called Answer Supervision), and
      the voice circuit is then set up. The advantage of Delay Dial is that some equipment is not ready to receive digits
      instantly, even though it has sent the wink; the delay compensates for this.




                      © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Introduction to Digital Circuits
Digital circuits have the chief advantage of allowing a much higher density of calls on a given physical connection; an
analog circuit can handle only one call at a time, whereas a digital circuit can handle many.

There are two main types of digital circuits: Common Channel Signaling (CCS) and Channel Associated Signaling
(CAS). CAS circuits are available in two speeds: Tl at 1.544Mbs supports 24 calls, and El at 2.048Mbs supports 30
calls. (For these values, we are assuming the calls are not compressed; more on this later). CCS circuits are designated as
PRI T l , PRI E l , and BRI. A PRI Tl can support 23 calls, a PRI El 30, and a BRI only 2.

The use of a digital circuit by definition implies that the voice signal must be digitized; the conversion from analog to
digital is performed by a codec. The following sections discuss the conversion of analog to digital.



Digitizing Analog Signals
There are four steps in the process of digitizing analog sound:

 1. Sample the analog sound at regular intervals

 2. Quantize the sample

 3. Encode the value into a binary expression

 4. Optionally compress the sample

Sampling could be done any number of times per second; the more samples taken per second, the higher the audio
quality, but the amount of digital data produced is much larger. Nyquist's theorem states that the sampling interval should
be 2x the highest frequency of the sample to produce acceptable audio quality during playback. Because the highest
frequency in human speech that we want to reproduce in telephony is around 4000 Hz, the sampling rate for standard toll-
quality digital voice is 8000 intervals per second. By contrast, CD music audio, which must encode both much higher and
much lower frequencies, samples at about 192,000 times per second.




                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Quantizing refers to making a digital approximation of an analog waveform. Imagine drawing an arc on a chessboard; if
you had to define the arc using only the square it was in for each row (segment) and column (interval), you would end up
with a stepped pattern that was sort of close to the original arc but not exact. This is exactly the process that happens with
quantization: the codec chooses a segment value that is as close as possible to the analog value at the interval it was
sampled, but it cannot be exact. To make the quantization more accurate, each sample is divided into 16 intervals that are
adjusted to more closely match the sampled wave. Furthermore, the segments are actually more fine-grained at the origin
than at the high and low ranges. This is because most of the human speech we are trying to capture accurately is in this
center range of the scale; there are fewer sounds at the very highest and lowest values.




                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
FIGURE 11
Quantizing the Digital
Sample




                         Encoding the signal is a simple process. We have a single 8-bit code word to identify whether the analog signal was a
                         positive or negative voltage, what value the signal was quantized to (which segment), and finally, which interval is repre-
                         sented by the code word. The first bit identifies either positive voltage (1) or negative (0). The next three bits represent
                         the segment. There are eight segments in the positive range and eight segments on the negative range, so three bits
                         provide the necessary encoding for the quantization. The last four bits identify the interval. A code word example is
                         shown next:

                           10011100

                         In this case, the first 1 indicates a positive voltage; the next digits of 001 indicate this is the first segment (on the positive
                         side), and 1100 indicates the twelfth interval.

                         The code word is 8 bits; we generate a code word 8000 times per second (the sample rate). This gives us a bitrate output
                         of 8 x 8000 = 64,000 bps (64 kbps). The process we just described is known as Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) and is the
                         standard for uncompressed digital voice in telephony. One voice stream thus requires 64k of bandwidth for transport.



                                               © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
NOTE                         Compression is not a required step, but it is often done to save bandwidth in VoIP environments. The two main types of
The determination of         compression we are concerned with are the following:
voice quality is based on
the Mean Opinion Score         • Adaptive Differential P C M (ADPCM): This method does not send entire code words, but instead sends a smaller
(MOS). This is a subjec-         code that represents the difference between this word and the last one sent. This is not commonly used today,
tive measurement,
                                 because it produces lower voice quality and compresses down only to about 16 kbps.
created by gathering the
opinion of live human          •   Conjugate Structure Algebraic Code Excited Linear Prediction (CS_ACELP): As the name suggests, this is
listeners. A sample                more complex compression. Based on a dictionary or codebook of known sounds made by a standardized American
recording is played, and
                                   male voice, the digital sample is analyzed and compared to the dictionary. The dictionary code that is the closest to
the listeners give it a
score out of 5, where 5 is         the sample is sent. The codebook is constantly learning. The output of this compression is typically 8 kbps—with
best. The same sample is           very little degradation of voice quality. This compression is widely used in VoIP.
played using different
compression or process-
ing methods and scored
again. Because MOS is        Time Division Multiplexing (TDM)
so subjective, other
                             T D M is the primary technology used in traditional digital voice; it is also extensively used in data circuits. The basic
quality measurements
exist that are more
                             premise is to take pieces of multiple streams of digital data and interleave them on a single transmission medium.
empirical and more accu-
rate. For reference, stan-   T1 Circuits
dard PCM encoding
(G.711) scores 4.1, and      On a Tl circuit, there are up to 24 channels available for voice. 64k from conversation 1 is loaded into the first Tl
G.729 scores 3.92.           channel, then 64k from the conversation 2 is loaded into the second channel, and so on. If not enough conversations exist
                             to fill the available channels, they are padded with null values. The 24 channels are grouped together as a frame.
                             Depending on the implementation, either 12 frames are grouped together as a larger frame (called SuperFrame or SF), or




                                                  © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
24 frames are grouped together (called Extended SuperFrame or ESF). T l s are typically full duplex, with two wires
sending and the other two wires receiving.


E1 Circuits
An El is very similar to a T l . There are 32 channels, of which 30 can be used for voice. (The other two are used for
framing and signaling, respectively.) The 32 channels are grouped together as a frame, and 16 frames are grouped
together as a multiframe. El circuits are common in Europe and Mexico, with some El services becoming available in
the United States.


Channel Associated Signaling (CAS)—T1
Although the 64 k channels of a Tl are intended to carry digitized voice, we must also be able to transmit signaling infor-
mation, such as on-hook and off-hook, addressing, and so forth. In CAS circuits, the least significant bit of each channel
in every sixth frame is "stolen" to generate signaling bit strings. SF implementation takes 12 frames and creates a
SuperFrame. Using one bit per channel in every sixth frame gives two 12-bit signaling strings (known as A and B) per
SuperFrame. The A and B strings are used to signal basic status, addressing, and supervisory messages. In ESF, 24 chan-
nels are in an Extended SuperFrame, which gives A, B, C, and D signaling strings. These can be used to signal more
advanced supervisory functions.

Because CAS takes one bit from each channel in every sixth frame, it is known as Robbed Bit Signaling (RBS). Using
RBS means that a slight degradation occurs in voice quality because every sixth frame has only 7 instead of 8 bits to
represent the sample; however, this is not generally a perceptible degradation.




                    © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Channel Associated Signaling (CAS)—T1
El signaling is slightly different. In an El CAS circuit, the first channel (channel 0 or timeslot 1) is reserved for framing
information. The 17th channel (channel 16 or timeslot 17) contains signaling information—no bits are robbed from the
individual channels. Timeslots 2 - 1 6 and 18-32 carry the voice data. Each channel has specific bits in timeslot 17 for
signaling. This means that although El CAS does not use RBS, it is still considered C A S ; however, the signaling is out-
of-band in its own timeslot.


Common Channel Signaling (CCS)
CCS provides for a completely out-of-band signaling channel. This is the function of the D channel in an ISDN PRI or
BRI implementation. The full 64 k of bandwidth per channel is available for voice; instead of generating A B C D bits, a
protocol known as Q.931 is used out-of-band in a separate channel for signaling. An ISDN PRI Tl provides 23 voice
channels of 64 k each (called Bearer or B channels) and one 64 k D (for Data) channel (timeslot 24) for signaling. An
ISDN PRI El provides 30 B channels and 1 D channel (timeslot 17); an ISDN BRI circuit provides two 64 k B channels
and one D channel of 16 k.




                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
U n d e r s t a n d i n g VoIP
The elements of traditional telephony—status, address and supervisory signaling, digitization, and so on—must have
functional parallels in the VoIP world for systems to function as people expect them to, and more importantly, for VoIP to
interact with the PSTN properly.

This section examines packetizing digital voice, signaling, and transport protocols, the components of a VoIP network,
and the factors that can cause problems in VoIP networks and how they can be mitigated.



Understanding Packetization
IP networks move data around in small pieces known as packets. Because we know how to digitize our voice, it now
becomes just another binary payload to move around in a packet. VoIP uses Digital Signal Processors (DSP) for the codec
functions. The digitized voice is then packaged in an appropriate protocol structure to move it through the IP infrastructure.


DSPs
DSPs are specialized chips that perform high-speed codec functions. DSPs are found in the IP phones to encode the
analog speech of the user and to decode the digitized contents of the packets arriving from the other end of the call. DSPs
are also used on IOS gateways at the interface to PSTN circuits, to change from a digital circuit to packetized voice, or
from an analog circuit to packetized voice. DSPs also change from one codec to another, allow conferencing and call
park, and other telephony features. DSPs are a vital component of a VoIP system. Different chip types have varying
capacities, but the general rule is that you want as many D S P resources available to you as possible. The D S P calculator
on cisco.com will help you calculate what you must have.


Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP)
RTP was developed to better serve real-time traffic such as voice and video. Voice payloads are encapsulated by RTP, then
by UDP, then by IP. A Layer 2 header of the correct format is applied; the type obviously depends on the link technology
in use by each router interface. A single voice call generates two one-way RTP/UDP/IP packet streams. U D P provides
multiplexing and checksum capability; RTP provides payload identification, timestamps, and sequence numbering.
                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Payload identification allows us to treat voice traffic differently from video, for example, simply by looking for the RTP
header label, simplifying our configuration tasks. Timestamping and sequence numbering allows VoIP devices to reorder
RTP packets that arrived out of sequence and play them back with the same timing in which they were recorded, elimi-
nating delays or jerkiness. There is no provision for retransmission of a lost RTP packet.

Each RTP stream is accompanied by a Real-Time Transport Control Protocol (RTCP) stream. RTCP monitors the quality
of the RTP stream, allowing devices to record events such as packet count, delay, loss, and jitter (delay variation).

A single voice packet by default contains a payload of 20 msec of voice (either uncompressed or compressed). Because
sampling is occurring at 8000 times per second, 20 msec gives us 160 samples. If we divide 8000 by 160, we see that we
are generating 50 packets with 160 bytes of payload, per second, for a one-way voice stream.

If we use compression, we can squeeze the 160-byte payload down to 20 bytes using the G.729 codec. We still have 160
samples, still 20 msec of audio, but reduced payload size.


Codecs
The codecs supported by Cisco include the following:

  •   G.711 (64kbps)—Toll-quality voice, uncompressed.

  •   G.729 (8kbps)

       •   Annex A variant: less processor-intensive, allows more voice channels encoded per DSP chip; lower audio
           quality than G.729

       •   Annex B variant: Allows the use of Voice Activity Detection and Comfort Noise Generation; can be applied to
           G.729 or G.729-A

The values for bandwidth shown do not include the Layer 3 and Layer 2 overhead; the actual bandwidth used by a single
(one-way) voice stream can be significantly larger. The following tables summarize the additional overhead added by
packetization and Layer 2 encapsulation (assume 50 packets per second (pps):


                      © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Bandwidth Calculation, Without Layer 2
Codec                              G.711                              G.729
Voice Payload                      160 Bytes                          20 Bytes
RTP Header                         12 Bytes                           12 Bytes
UDP Header                         8 Bytes                            8 Bytes
IP Header                          20 Bytes                           20 Bytes
Total Before Layer 2               200 Bytes                          60 Bytes
Total Bitrate @ 50 pps             80,000 bps (80 kbps)               24,000 bps (24 kbps)


Bandwidth Calculation, With Layer 2
Layer 2 Type                  G.711 = 2 0 0 Bytes/packet                           G.729 = 60 Bytes/packet
Ethernet                      18 Bytes                                             18 Bytes
Multilink PPP                                 6 Bytes                                              6 Bytes
Frame Relay FRF. 12                                           6 Bytes                                              6 Bytes
Total incl. Layer 2           218 Bytes       206 Bytes       206 Bytes           78 Bytes         66 Bytes        66 Bytes
Total Bitrate incl. Layer 2   87.200          82,400          82,400              31,200           26,400          26,400
(@ 50 pps)                    (87.2 kbps)     (82.4 kbps)     (82.4 kbps)         (31.2 kbps)      (26.4 kbps)     (26.4 kbps)


When using G.729, the RTP/UDP/IP header of 40 bytes is twice the size of the 20B voice payload. This consumes signif-
icant bandwidth just for header transmission on a slow link. The recommended solution is to use Compressed RTP
(cRTP) on slow WAN links. cRTP reduces the RTP/UDP/IP header to 2 bytes without checksums or 4 bytes with check-
sums. The effect of using cRTP is illustrated in the following table. (Note: Ethernet is not included because it is not clas-
sified as a slow link.)




                       © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Bandwidth Calculation, Using cRTP
Codec                                                   G.711                                   G.729
Voice Payload                                           160 Bytes                               20 Bytes
cRTP header w/ chksum                                   4 Bytes                                 4 Bytes
cRTP header no chksum                                                       2 Bytes                               2 Bytes
Total before Layer 2:                                   164 Bytes           162 Bytes           24 Bytes          22 Bytes
Multilink PPP or
Frame Relay FRF. 12                                     6 Bytes                                 6 Bytes
Total WAN bandwidth @50 pps incl. Layer 2:              68000 bps           67,200 bps          12,000 bps        11,200
                                                        (68 kbps)           (67.2 kbps)         (12 kbps)         (11.2 kbps)



Voice Activity Detection (VAD)
Phone conversations on average include about 3 5 % silence. In Cisco Unified Communications, by default silence is pack-
etized and transmitted, consuming the same bandwidth as speech. In situations where bandwidth is very scarce, the VAD
feature can be enabled, causing the voice stream to be stopped during periods of silence. The theory here is that the band-
width otherwise used for silence can be reclaimed for voice or data transmission. VAD also adds Comfort Noise
Generation (CNG), which fills in the dead silence created by the stopped voice flow with white noise. VAD should not be
taken into account during the network design bandwidth allocation process because its effectiveness varies with back-
ground noise and speech patterns. VAD is also made ineffective by Music on Hold and fax features. In reality, VAD typi-
cally causes more problems than it solves, and it is usually wiser to add the necessary bandwidth.




                        © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Additional DSP Functions
In addition to digitizing voice, D S P resources are used for the following:

  •   Conferencing: DSPs mix the audio streams from the conference participants and transmit the mix (minus their own)
      to each participant.

  •   Transcoding and Media Termination Points (MTP): A transcoder changes a packetized audio stream from one
      codec to another, perhaps for transit across a slow WAN link. MTPs provide a point for the stream to be terminated
      while other services are set up.

  • Echo Cancellation: DSPs provide the calculation power needed to analyze the audio stream and filter out the repeti-
      tive patterns that indicate echo. Echo is a chief cause of perceived poor voice quality; echo cancellation is an impor-
      tant function.




                       © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
I n t r o d u c i n g VoIP Signaling Protocols
VoIP signaling protocols are responsible for call setup, maintenance, and teardown. A number of different protocols are in
use—some standards-based, others proprietary, and each with advantages and disadvantages. The following sections
introduce the signaling protocols you should know about, including SCCP, H.323, MGCP, and SIP.



VoIP Signaling Protocols
VoIP signaling protocols handle the call setup, maintenance, and teardown functions of VoIP calls. It is important to keep
in mind that the signaling functions are an entirely separate packet stream from the actual voice bearer path (RTP). The
signaling protocol in use must pass the supervisory, informational, and address information expected in any telephony
system.

VoIP signaling protocols are either peer-to-peer or client-server; in the case of peer-to-peer protocols, the endpoints have
the intelligence to perform the call-control signaling themselves, Client-server protocols send event notifications to the
call agent (the Unified CM server) and receive instructions on what actions to perform in response. The following table
summarizes the characteristics of the four signaling protocols dealt with here.
                                        Inter-Vendor          Implemented            Implemented
Protocol   Standard?                    Compatibility         on Gateways            on Cisco IP Phones                    Operating Mode
H.323      Yes--ITU                     Very Good             Yes                    No                                    Peer-to-Peer
MGCP       Yes--IETF                    Good                  Yes                    No                                    Client/Server
SIP        Yes--IETF                    Basic                 Yes                    Yes; also third-party phones          Peer-to-Peer
SCCP       N o - -Cisco Proprietary     Cisco only            Some                   Cisco IP Phones only                  Client/Server



H.323
H.323 is not itself a protocol; it is an umbrella standard that defines several other related protocols for specific tasks.
Originally conceived as a multimedia signaling protocol to emulate traditional telephony functionality in IP L A N


                      © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
environments, it is a long-established and stable protocol very suitable for intervendor compatibility. H.323 is supported
by all Cisco voice gateways and CM platforms as well as some third-party video endpoints.


MGCP
Media Gateway Control Protocol is a lightweight client/server protocol for PSTN gateways and some clients. It is simple
to configure and allows the call agent to control the M G C P gateway, eliminating the need for expensive gateways with
intelligence and complex configurations. The gateway reports events such as a trunk going off-hook, and the call agent
instructs the gateway on what to do; the gateway has no local dial plan because all call routing decisions are made at the
call agent and relayed to the M G C P gateway. M G C P is not as widely implemented as SIP or H.323. M G C P is not
supported by Unified CM Express or the Smart Business Communication System.


SIP
Session Initiation Protocol is an IETF standard that uses peer-to-peer signaling. It is very similar in structure and syntax
to HTTP, and because it is text-based, it is relatively simple to debug and troubleshoot. SIP can use multiple transport
layer protocols and can support security and proxy functions. SIP is an evolving standard that currently provides basic
telephony functionality; further developments and extensions to the standard will soon make it feature-comparable with
SCCP. One of its most important capabilities is creating SIP trunks to IP Telephony service providers, replacing or
enhancing traditional T D M PSTN connections.


SCCP
Skinny Client Control Protocol is a Cisco-proprietary signaling protocol used in a client-server manner between Unified
CM and Cisco IP Phones (and some Cisco gateways). SCCP uses TCP connections to the Unified CM to set up, maintain,
and tear down voice and video calls. It is referred to as a stimulus protocol, meaning that it sends messages in response to
events such as a phone going off-hook or a digit being dialed. SCCP is the default signaling protocol for all Cisco IP
phones, although many also support SIP; SIP does not yet support the full feature set available to SCCP phones. All
Cisco Unified Communications call agents (CM, CM Express, and the 500 Series) and some gateways support SCCP.



                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
C o n n e c t i n g a VoIP S y s t e m to a S e r v i c e Provider
Network
A VoIP system that can place calls only to other devices on the IP network is only marginally useful; we still need to
place calls out to the PSTN, and to do so we need to connect to a phone service provider, whether via traditional T D M
links or ITSP connections. The device that acts as the interface to the PSTN is the voice gateway; it provides the physical
connection and logical translation between two or more different network technologies.



Understanding Gateways, Voice Ports, and Dial Peers
The following sections establish some terms of reference.

Gateways
In the Cisco Unified Communications architecture, a gateway is typically a voice-enabled router with an appropriate
voice port installed and configured. Gateways can have both analog and digital voice port connections, including analog
FXO, F X S , and E & M or digital T l / E l or PRI interfaces.

Call Legs
A call leg is the inbound or outbound call path as it passes through the gateway. As the call comes into the gateway, it is
associated with an inbound port. (This is the inbound call leg.) As the call is sent out another gateway port, this creates
the outbound call leg. There will be inbound and outbound call legs at each gateway router.


Dial Peers
A dial peer is a pointer to an endpoint, identified by an address (a pattern of digits). Cisco gateways support two types of
dial peers: POTS and VoIP. POTS dial peers are addressed with PSTN phone numbers, and VoIP dial peers are addressed
by IP addresses. Dial peers identify the source and destination endpoints of call legs; an inbound call leg is matched to a
dial peer, and the outbound call leg is routed to a destination dial peer. Depending on the direction of the call, the dial peers
may be POTS inbound and VoIP outbound, vice versa, or possibly both VoIP. It is unlikely but not impossible that the

                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
inbound and outbound dial peers would both be POTS. Each dial peer also defines attributes such as the codec to use, QoS
settings, and other feature settings. Dial peers are configured in the gateway IOS, using either the CLI or GUI interface.

The partial output that follows shows a simple POTS dial peer configuration:

G a t e w a y ( c o n f i g ) # d i a l - p e e r v o i c e 10 p o t s
Gateway(config-dialpeer)#destination-pattern                             8675309
Gateway(config-dialpeer)#port                          1/0/1


The number assigned to dial peers is arbitrary, although dial peer 0 exists by default and cannot be deleted. The keyword
pots creates a POTS dial peer; the keyword voip would create a VoIP dial peer. The destination-pattern command iden-
tifies that the attached device (phone or PBX) terminates calls to the specified number (or a range of numbers if connect-
ing to a PBX). The port command identifies the physical hardware connection the dial peer will use to reach the
destination pattern.

The destination-pattern command associates a phone number with a dial peer. The specified pattern can be a specific
phone number (as above, 8675309) or an expression that defines a range of numbers. The router uses the patterns to
decide which dial peer (and associated physical port) it should route a call to. The following table briefly explains
destination-pattern syntax.
Character            Meaning
+                    The preceding digit is repeated one or more times.
* and #              NOT wildcards; these are valid DTMF digits.
, (comma)            Inserts a one-second pause.
. (dot)              Specifies any one wildcard digit (0 - 9, *, #). The pattern "20." would match all strings from 200 through 209, plus
                     20*and20#.

[]                   Square brackets define a range, within which any one digit may be matched; for example, "20[4-6]" defines 204, 205,
                     and 206.
T                    Indicates a variable length string; this is useful in cases where local, long-distance, and international PSTN numbers
                     may be called; the destination pattern could men be ".T". This pattern would match any string of up to 32 digits.


                                  © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
C o n n e c t i n g a VoIP S y s t e m to a S e r v i c e P r o v i d e r N e t w o r k
                               Configuring VoIP dial peers is equally simple. Examine the following configuration:
                            G a t e w a y ( c o n f i g ) # d i a l - p e e r voice 20 voip
                            Gateway(config-dialpeer)#                 destination-pattern         4....
                            Gateway(config-dialpeer)#                 session      target     ipv4:10.1.1.2


                            In this example, the destination pattern is any four-digit number starting with "4." A new command, session-target, is
                            used to identify the IP (version 4 in this case) address of the gateway or call agent that will terminate the call. If the IP
                            address is on a router, it should be a loopback IP so that the address is always available even if a physical interface fails.
                            The preceding configuration creates an H.323 dial peer (in contrast to a SIP dial-peer).

                            Routers attempt to match dial peers for the inbound call leg according to the following rules:

NOTE                           1. Look for the incoming called-number command in a dial peer that matches the called number or DNIS string of the
The default dial peer 0           inbound leg.
cannot be deleted or
modified. It does not         2. Look for the answer-address command in a dial peer that matches the calling number or ANI string of the inbound
negotiate services such          call leg.
as VAD, DTMF Relay, or
                              3. Look for the destination-pattern command in a dial peer that matches the calling number or ANI string of the
TCL applications. The
dial peer 0 configuration        inbound call leg.
for inbound VoIP calls        4. Look for the POTS dial peer port command that matches the voice port of the incoming call (POTS dial peers only).
contains the following:
•   Any codec
                              5. If all of the above fail to match, match against Default Dial Peer 0 as a last resort.

•   VAD enabled             The default dial peer 0 config for inbound POTS calls includes the following:
• No RSVP Support
                               • no ivr application
• Fax-rate voice
                            When a router is matching the dialed digits against the patterns in the configured dial peers, it attempts to find the longest
                            match. This occurs on a digit-by-digit basis. Each successive digit may validate some patterns while eliminating others
                            until a single pattern represents the longest match between the dialed digits and the destination pattern, at which point the
                            call is routed to the outbound dial peer configured with that matching pattern.


                                                           © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Consider the following configuration:

d i a l - p e e r voice 10 voip
destination-pattern              .T
session t a r g e t      ipv4:10.10.10.1
i
d i a l peer v o i c e 2 0 v o i p
destination-pattern 867[2-3]...
session t a r g e t      ipv4:10.10.20.1
!
d i a l - p e e r voice 30 voip
destination-pattern 8674...
session t a r g e t i p v 4 :      10.10.30.1
i
d i a l - p e e r voice 40 voip
d e s t i n a t i o n - p a t t e r n 8675309
session t a r g e t ipv4:10.10.40.1


Given this configuration, the following example dialed numbers illustrate how the patterns match dialed digits:

    •   The dialed number 867-5309 will match dial peer 40 (exact 7-digit match)

    •   The dialed number 867-4309 will match dial peer 30 (first four digits match)

    •   The dialed number 867-3309 will match dial peer 20 (first four digits match)

    •   The dialed number 876-5309 will match dial peer 10 (no other exact match, so the " . T " pattern matches)



Internet Telephony Service Providers
As VoIP technology matured and stabilized, telephone service providers began extending VoIP connectivity to their
customers, allowing for simple, flexible connection alternatives to traditional T D M links. Internet Telephony Service


                                © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Providers (ITSP) connections are typically much less expensive, available in smaller bandwidth increments than Tl or
PRI links, and can route nonvoice data traffic concurrently. QoS configuration is supported (and in fact is required for
proper VoIP operation). Most ITSP links use SIP, but H.323 is an option. The gateway configuration is relatively simple,
with the creation of a VoIP dial peer pointing at the provider with the parameters they supply. PSTN calls are routed to
the provider, who then routes calls to their PSTN connection, usually with a toll-minimizing route that dramatically
reduces long-distance costs to the customer.



Understanding Call Setup and Digit Manipulation
Successfully completing a phone call requires that the correct digits are sent to the terminating device, whether on the
VoIP network or the PSTN. PSTN calls are typically more complex because of the varying local and international
requirements for the number of digits required to route the call. Over and above this basic requirement are the additional
complexities imposed by requirements of the business: we may want to change our A N I number, add or strip access
codes, compensate for undesirable default behavior, or build specialized functionality for our particular purposes. This
section deals with digit manipulation and troubleshooting.


Digit Consumption and Forwarding
Some strange things happen when an IOS gateway matches a dial peer for an outbound call leg and forwards the dialed
digits to the terminating device.

For POTS dial peers, the gateway consumes (meaning strips away) the left-justified digits that exactly match the dial-peer
destination pattern and forwards only the wildcard-matched digits to the terminating device. Clearly, this could cause
problems if the PSTN were to receive only 4 digits, as in this example:
d i a l - p e e r voice 20 pots
destination-pattern        867....
port   1/0:1




                          © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
With this configuration, if the dialed number was 867-5309, the gateway would forward only 5309 (the wildcard
matches), and the PSTN would be unable to route the call. Adding the command no digit-strip in the dial-peer configura-
tion will change this behavior and cause the gateway to forward all dialed digits.

For VoIP dial peers, the default behavior is to forward all collected digits.


Digit Collection
The router will collect digits one at a time and attempt to match a destination pattern. As soon as it has an exact match,
the call is immediately placed, and no more digits are collected. If there are destination patterns that have overlapping
digits, this can cause calls to be misrouted, as in the following example:
Dial-peer voice 1 voip
D e s t i n a t i o n p a t t e r n 555
Session t a r g e t       ipv4:10.1.1.1
!
Dial-peer voice 2 voip
D e s t i n a t i o n - p a t t e r n 5552112
Session t a r g e t       ipv4:10.2.2.2


If the user dials 555-2112, dial peer 1 will exactly match at the third digit, the call will be immediately routed using dial
peer 1, and only the collected digits of 555 will be forwarded. We solve the problem by changing the configuration as
shown next:

Dial-peer voice 1 voip
Destination pattern 5 5 5 . . . .
Session t a r g e t       ipv4:10.1.1.1
!
Dial-peer voice 2 voip
D e s t i n a t i o n - p a t t e r n 5552112
Session t a r g e t       ipv4:10.2.2.2




                                © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Now, when the third digit is entered, the router cannot make an exact match because both dial peers are possible matches;
when the last digit is dialed, the router determines that dial peer 2 is an exact match and immediately places the call. Dial
peer 1 is also a match, but because of the wildcards, the destination pattern matches 10,000 possible numbers (0000
through 9999); it is not as close a match as dial peer 2.


Digit Manipulation
Sometimes we need to add, change, or remove digits before the call is placed. We do this to avoid inconveniencing users
or to match the dialed digit requirements of a gateway or the PSTN. We have several methods of modifying the digit
string, as described in the following sections.

prefix
The prefix dial-peer command adds digits to the beginning of the string after the outbound dial peer is matched but
before passing digits to the destination. An example of its use is a POTS dial peer with 2 . . . as the destination pattern. If
the user dials 2112, the default behavior is for the POTS dial peer to forward only 112. Adding the command prefix
6045552 forces the router to prepend the additional digits required to route the call over the PSTN:

d i a l - p e e r voice 20 pots
destination-pattern        2...
prefix    6045552
port     1/0/0



forward-digits
forward-digits: This dial-peer command forces the specified number of digits to be forwarded, whether the digits were
exact match or wildcard matches, overriding the default behavior of stripping the exact matches. You can specify a
number of digits to forward (as shown in the example that follows) or use forward-digits all to force all dialed digits to
be forwarded.

d i a l - p e e r voice 20 pots
destination-pattern        5552...



                          © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
forward-digits 7
port    1/0/0



Number        Expansion
num-exp: The number expansion table is a global command that either expands an extension (perhaps a 4-digit extension
into a full 10-digit PSTN number) or completely replaces one number with another. This command is applied before the
outbound dial peer is matched, so there must be a configured dial peer that matches the expanded number for the call to
be forwarded.

num-exp 2 . . .     5552...
d i a l - p e e r voice 20 pots
destination-pattern             5552...
port    1/0/0



Translation    Rules
voice translation-rule: This global command configures number translation profiles to allow us to alter the ANI, DNIS,
or redirect number for a call. Using the command is a three-step process:

  1. Define the translation rule globally:
       voice t r a n s l a t i o n - r u l e 1
          rule 1      /555/ /867/


       The rule command defines a pattern to match (in this case 555) and a pattern to change the matched digits to (in this
       case 867). The match and replace patterns are identified and separated by the "/" characters that begin and end the
       patterns.




                              © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
2. Create the voice translation profile containing the translate instruction (the options are [calledlcallingl
           redirect-calledlredirect-target], and reference the rule we just defined by number. In this example we are translat-
           ing the called number:
           v o i c e t r a n s l a t i o n - p r o f i l e JENNY
            translate called 1


        3. Apply the profile to one or more dial peers, either inbound or outbound:
           d i a l - p e e r voice 20 pots
           description translated                 t o Jenny
           t r a n s l a t i o n - p r o f i l e outgoing JENNY
           destination-pattern               5552...
           port     1/0/0


Translation rules use regular expression syntax, which can be quite complex. The following table defines the characters
used, and examples follow.

Cisco Regular Expression Characters for Voice Translation Rules
Character                 Description
                          Matches any single character.
 (match)                 In the match phrase: Escape the special meaning of the next character.
(replace)                In the replace phrase: Reference a set number from the match phrase.
A
                          Match the expression at the beginning of the digit string.
$                          Match the expression at the end of the digit string.
/                         Identifies the start and end of both the match and replace phrases.
[0-9]                     Match a single character in a list.
    A
[ 0-9]                    Do not match a single character specified in the list.

                                                                                                                                                          continues

                                    © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Cisco Regular Expression Characters for Voice Translation Rules                              continued
*                     Repeat the previous expression 0 or more times.
+                     Repeat the previous expression 1 or more times.
?                     Repeat the previous expression 0 or 1 time.
()                    Identifies a set in the match expression.


Example 1:

rule 1        /123/ /456/


The first set of forward slashes defines the match phrase; the second set defines the replace phrase. This expression means
"match 123 and replace it with 456." Thus:

        •   123 is replaced with 456

        •   6123 is replaced with 6456

        •   1234 is replaced with 4564

        •   1234123 is replaced with 4564123 (only the first instance of the match is replaced)

Example 2:
voice t r a n s l a t i o n ? r u l e 1
               A
rule 1        / 4 0 . . . / /66660B0/

This example replaces any five-digit number that begins with " 4 0 " with the number "6666000".

Example 3:

voice t r a n s l a t i o n ? r u l e 1
    A
/ (867)(....)/             /5552/



                               © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
This example means: "If the number starts with 867 and is followed by any four other digits, change the 867 to 555 and
replace the other four digits with the digits in Set 2 of the match." Remember that the forward slashes define the match
and replace phrases; the backslashes mean "the next character is not part of what to match"; the round brackets indicate
which sets of characters in the matched number to keep in the replaced number. The sets are numbered starting with 1, so
the first set of round brackets is 1, and the second is 2 (as in this example).



Private Line Automatic Ringdown (PLAR)
PLAR creates a permanent association between a voice port and a destination number (or voice port). When PLAR is
configured, going off-hook on that voice port automatically dials the pattern specified by the connection plar <number>
command. The caller does not hear a dial tone and does not have to dial a number. Think of PLAR as a hotline; pick up
the Batline and you get Batman without having to dial.

The following shows a simple P L A R configuration that will call 867-5309 when the phone goes off-hook:

voice     port    1/0/0
connection        p l a r 8675309




Troubleshooting Dial Plans and Dial Peers
The following sections discuss some of the commands available to troubleshoot your configuration.


show dial-peer voice
To display information for voice dial peers, use the show dial-peer voice command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC
mode.

show d i a l - p e e r v o i c e   [number | summary]




                               © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Syntax Description
number              (Optional) A specific voice dial peer. Output displays detailed information about that dial peer.
summary             (Optional) Output displays a short summary of each voice dial peer.


If both the name argument and summary keyword are omitted, output displays detailed information about all voice dial
peers.

The following is sample output from this command for a VoIP dial peer:

Router# show d i a l - p e e r v o i c e 101


VoiceOverIpPeer101
           peer t y p e = v o i c e ,     information type = voice,
           description        =   '',
           tag = 6001,         destination-pattern =              "6001',
           answer-address =             '',   preference=0,
           CLID R e s t r i c t i o n = None
                                                1
           CLID Network Number = "
           CLID Second Number s e n t
           CLID O v e r r i d e RDNIS = d i s a b l e d ,
           source c a r r i e r - i d =             target c a r r i e r - i d =
           source t r u n k - g r o u p - l a b e l =   '',     target trunk-group-label = ' ' ,
           numbering Type = "unknown'
           group = 6 0 0 1 , Admin s t a t e i s u p , O p e r a t i o n s t a t e i s up,
           i n c o m i n g c a l l e d - number =          connections/maximum = 0 / u n l i m i t e d ,
           DTMF Relay = d i s a b l e d ,
           <output      omitted>




                             © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
The following is sample output from this command with the summary keyword:
Router# show d i a l - p e e r v o i c e summary


d i a l - p e e r hunt 0
                                                                               PASS
  TAG TYPE         ADMIN OPER PREFIX              DEST-PATTERN          PREF THRU SESS TARGET
   100 p o t s     up        up                                          0
   101 v o i p     up        up                   5550112                0      syst ipv4 10.10.1 1
   102 v o i p     up        up                   5550134                0      syst ipv4 10.10.1 1
    99 v o i p     up        down                                        0      syst
    33 p o t s     up        down                                        0



debug voip dialpeer inout
To display information about the voice dial peers, use the debug voip dialpeer command in privileged EXEC mode.

Router# debug v o i p d i a l p e e r i n o u t


v o i p d i a l p e e r i n o u t debugging i s o n


*May     1 19:32:11.731:            //-1/6372E2598012/DPM/dpAssociateIncomingPeerCore:
    Result=Success(0)             a f t e r DP_MATCH_INCOMING_DNIS;       Incoming D i a l - p e e r = 1 0 0
*May     1 19:32:11.731:            //-1/6372E2598012/DPM/dpAssociateIncomingPeerCore:
    C a l l i n g Number=4085550111, C a l l e d Number=3600, V o i c e - l n t e r f a c e = 0 x 0 ,
    Timeout=TRUE, Peer Encap Type=ENCAP_VOIP, Peer Search Type=PEER_TYPE_VOICE,
    Peer     I n f o Type=DIALPEER_INFO_SPEECH
*May     1 19:32:11.731:            //-1/6372E2598012/DPM/dpAssociateIncomingPeerCore:
    Result=Success(0)             a f t e r DP_MATCH_INCOMING_DNIS;       Incoming D i a l - p e e r = 1 0 0
*May     1   19:32:11.735:         //-1/6372E2598012/DPM/dpMatchPeersCore:
    C a l l i n g Number=,    C a l l e d Number=3600,      Peer I n f o Type=DIALPEER_INFO_SPEECH




                             © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
*May      1   19:32:11.735:            //-1/6372E2598012/DPM/dpMatchPeersCore:
     Match Rule=DP_MATCH_DEST;                  C a l l e d Number=3600
*May      1   19:32:11.735:            //-1/6372E2598012/DPM/dpMatchPeersCore:
     Result=Success(0)               a f t e r DP_MATCH_DEST
*May      1   19:32:11.735:            //-1/6372E2598012/DPM/dpMatchPeersMoreArg:
     Result=SUCCESS(0)


The following event shows the matched dial peers in the order of priority:

List of Matched Outgoing Dial Peer(s):

    1: Dial PeerTag=3600

   2: Dial Peer Tag=36




Troubleshooting Signaling for POTS Call Legs
show controllers t1
The show controllers tl command displays Tl (or E l ) controller status and function. The following is sample output
from this command:

Router# show c o n t r o l l e r s         t1


T1 4 / 1 i s u p .

Applique type is Channelized T1
Cablelength is short                 133
No a l a r m s d e t e c t e d .
Framing i s ESF,            L i n e Code i s AMI,       Clock Source i s l i n e
Data i n c u r r e n t i n t e r v a l     (10 seconds e l a p s e d ) :
        0 L i n e Code V i o l a t i o n s , 0 Path Code V i o l a t i o n s 0 S l i p Sees, 0 Fr Loss Sees,


                                   © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
C o n n e c t i n g a VoIP S y s t e m to a S e r v i c e P r o v i d e r N e t w o r k
                                    0 L i n e E r r Sees, 0 Degraded Mins 0 E r r o r e d Sees, 0 B u r s t y E r r Sees,
                                    0 S e v e r e l y E r r Sees,      0 U n a v a i l Sees

                            In this output, no alarms were detected. Possible alarms are as follows:

                               •    Transmitter is sending remote alarm.

                               •    Transmitter is sending AIS.

                               •    Receiver has loss of signal.

                               •    Receiver is getting AIS.

                               •    Receiver has loss of frame.

                               •    Receiver has remote alarm.

                               •    Receiver has no alarms.


                            show voice port
                            Use the show voice port command to display configuration and voice-interface-card-specific information about a specific
                            port.

                            The following is sample output for an E & M analog voice port:

                             Router# show v o i c e         port     1/0/0


                             E&M S l o t i s 1 ,      Sub-unit is 0,         Port is 0
                              Type of V o i c e P o r t is E&M
                              O p e r a t i o n S t a t e is DORMANT
                              A d m i n i s t r a t i v e S t a t e is UP


                              I n i t i a l Time Out i s s e t t o 0 s
                              I n t e r d i g i t Time Out i s s e t t o 0 s


                                                            © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Analog     Info Follows:
 Region Tone i s s e t f o r n o r t h a m e r i c a




 Voice card s p e c i f i c        Info Follows:
 S i g n a l Type     is wink-start
 O p e r a t i o n Type i s 2 - w i r e
 E&M Type is 1
 D i a l Type i s dtmf
 In Seizure          is   inactive
 Out S e i z u r e    is i n a c t i v e



show dialplan number
To display which outgoing dial peer is reached when a particular telephone number is dialed, use the show dialplan
number command in privileged EXEC mode.

Router# show d i a l p l a n number 1001


Macro E x p . :      1001


VoiceEncapPeer1003
             i n f o r m a t i o n type = v o i c e ,
             t a g = 1003,         destination-pattern =                1001',
             answer-address =                  '',   preference=0,
                                           1
             numbering Type =                  unknown'
             group = 1003, Admin s t a t e i s u p ,                 O p e r a t i o n s t a t e i s up,
             incoming called-number =                     '',   connections/maximum = 0 / u n l i m i t e d ,
             DTMF Relay = d i s a b l e d ,
             huntstop = enabled,
             type = pots,            prefix = ' ' ,



                                © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
forward-digits          default
                                                                   1
                                          session-target =             ' , v o i c e - p o r t = '1/1'



                            debug voip ccapi inout
                            The debug voip ccapi inout c o m m a n d traces the execution path through the call control API, which serves as the inter-
                            face between the call session application and the underlying network-specific software. You can use the output from this
                            c o m m a n d to understand how calls are being handled by the router. This c o m m a n d shows how a call flows through the
                            system. Using this debug level, you can see the call setup and teardown operations performed on both the telephony and
                            network call legs.

                            Router# debug v o i p c c a p i i n o u t
                            v o i p c c a p i i n o u t debugging i s o n


NOTE                        T h e following lines show information about the calling and called numbers. T h e network presentation indicator (NPI)
This debug generates a      shows the type of transmission. The Incoming Dial-Peer field shows that the incoming dial peer has been matched.
very long output, which
is impractical to fully     *Apr 18 2 0 : 4 2 : 1 9 . 3 4 7 :   //-1/9C5A9CA88009/CCAPI/cc_api_call_setup_ind_common:

duplicate here. I suggest   Interface=0x64F26F10,               Call     Info(
you familiarize yourself    Calling Number=4085550111(TON=National, NPI=ISDN, S c r e e n i n g = U s e r , Passed,
with sample outputs from    Presentation=Allowed),
the Cisco IOS Debug         Called Number=83103(TON=Unknown,                        NPI=Unknown),
Command Guide or            C a l l i n g Translated=FALSE,            S u b s r i b e r Type S t r = R e g u l a r L i n e ,   FinalDestinationFlag=TRUE,
better yet from your own    Incoming Dial-peer=1, P r o g r e s s I n d i c a t i o n = N U L L ( 0 ) , C a l l i n g I E Present=TRUE,
lab experimentation.
                            Source T r k g r p Route L a b e l = , T a r g e t T r k g r p Route L a b e l = ,              CLID T r a n s p a r e n t = F A L S E ) , C a l l
                            Id=-1
                            *Apr 18 2 0 : 4 2 : 1 9 . 3 4 7 :   //-1/9C5A9CA88009/CCAPI/ccCheckClipClir:
                            I n : C a l l i n g Number=4085550111(TON=National,                       NPI=ISDN, S c r e e n i n g = U s e r ,       Passed,
                            Presentation=Allowed)
                            *Apr 18 2 0 : 4 2 : 1 9 . 3 4 7 :   //-1/9C5A9CA88009/CCAPI/ccCheckClipClir:
                            Out:    C a l l i n g Number=4085550111(TON=National,                       NPI=ISDN,         Screening=User,             Passed,
                            Presentation=Allowed)


                                                          © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Preparing the Infrastructure to Support Unified
Communications
In this section, the best practices components for preparing the network to properly support Unified Communications are
explored. Topics covered include the following:

  •   Voice VLANs

  •   DHCP

  •   NTP

  •   Power over Ethernet

  •   IP Phone firmware and configuration files


Voice VLANs
VLANs provide a logical separation of Layer 3 traffic and are created at Layer 2 (the network switch). A voice V L A N
(VVLAN, also called an Auxiliary VLAN) is an additional V L A N for the exclusive use of VoIP and video traffic. The
benefits of using a V V L A N include isolation from the broadcast traffic data VLANs, a measure of additional security, and
simpler deployment because you do not have to renumber the IP address scheme of the whole network to add VoIP
endpoints. (Each V L A N is a new, separate subnet.)

Most Cisco IP Phones are actually 3-port switches. The port that connects to the network switch can act as an 802. lq
trunk, allowing both voice and data traffic to be multiplexed in their respective VLANs on the single cable to the network
switch. The second port connects the desktop PC to the phone (and thus to the network over the trunk on the first port),
and the third port is an internal one for the voice traffic generated and received by the phone.

On many Cisco switches, the port connecting the phone does not need to be a trunk; it can be an access port instead. The
switch is capable of sending the V V L A N ID using CDP messages, and the phone then sends frames from itself tagged
with the learned V V L A N ID and forwards frames from the attached PC untagged. These untagged frames will be tagged
with the access V L A N ID configured on the switch port when they are processed by the switch.

                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
The phone adds a QoS marking to its own frames, using the 802. lq frame header Class of Service (CoS) field. The phone
marks its frames as CoS 5 by default. This is the recommended setting, but it can be modified.

The following is a typical switchport configuration for an attached IP Phone in V V L A N 100 and the PC in V L A N 50:

Switch(config)#interface                   FastEthernet           0/1
S w i t c h ( c o n f i g - i f ) # s w i t c h p o r t mode access
S w i t c h ( c o n f i g - i f ) # s w i t c h p o r t access v l a n 5 0
Switch(config-if)#switchport                     voice vlan           100
Switch(config-if)#spanning-tree                        portfast




DHCP
It is recommended that you use D H C P for IP Phone addressing. Create a separate subnet for the Voice V L A N and add the
Option 150 parameter to identify the T F T P server IP address. This can be done on an existing D H C P server, or a new one
can be added if necessary; Cisco routers have D H C P server capability. The following configuration is a typical example
of router-based D H C P to support IP Phones:

service       dhcp
! e n a b l e s t h e DHCP s e r v i c e
I
i p dhcp e x c l u d e d - a d d r e s s 1 0 . 1 . 1 . 1   10.1.1.10

!   s p e c i f i e s a s t a r t / e n d range of addresses t h a t DHCP w i l l NOT a s s i g n


ip dhcp p o o l name IP_PH0NES
! C r e a t e s a p o o l of a d d r e s s e s ( c a s e - s e n s i t i v e name) and e n t e r s DHCP c o n f i g u r a t i o n mode
I
network 1 0 . 1 . 1 . 0 2 5 5 . 2 5 5 . 2 5 5 . 0
! D e f i n e s t h e subnet o f a d d r e s s e s f o r t h e p o o l


default-router           address        10.1.1.1
!   D e f i n e s t h e d e f a u l t gateway

                                 © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
d n s - s e r v e r address     192.168.1.10          192.168.1.11
!   i d e n t i f i e s t h e DNS s e r v e r IP a d d r e s s ( e s )   - up to 8 I P ' s
!
option      150 i p     192.168.1.2
!   i d e n t i f i e s t h e TFTP s e r v e r IP



If you choose to use a D H C P server that resides on a different network, you will need to add the ip helper-address
<ip-address> command on the Voice V L A N interface of the router so that it will forward D H C P broadcasts from the
phones to the D H C P server.



Network Time Protocol
Clock synchronization is important in VoIP systems for accurate Call Detail Records (used for billing), easier trou-
bleshooting and debugging, and for good voice performance. Network Time Protocol (NTP) is used on all Cisco devices
to sync the system clock to a master clock. IP Phones get their time from the call agent (CM, CM Business Edition, CM
Express, or SBCS). The call agent(s) are configured to get their time from a master clock, usually a highly accurate
atomic or radio clock external to the network.

R o u t e r ( c o n f i g ) # c l o c k timezone pst     -8
! S p e c i f i e s t h e l o c a l t i m e z o n e as PST (8 hours b e h i n d GMT)


R o u t e r ( c o n f i g ) # c l o c k summer-time zone r e c u r r i n g f i r s t Sunday a p r i l 0 2 : 0 0 l a s t   Sunday October 02:00
! A c t i v a t e s Summer Time change in t h e s p e c i f i e d d a t e range
!
Router(config)#ntp               server      10.1.2.3
!   I d e n t i f i e s t h e NTP master c l o c k address




                                © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Cisco IP Phone Firmware and XML Configuration Files
Cisco IP Phones need the following three separate files to function:

  •   The firmware file: This file is loaded into nonvolatile memory and is persistent across reboots. To make the
      firmware files available to the phones, use the router command tftp-server flash:firmware-file-name. The command
      load phone-type firmware-file is also required to associate the model of IP phone with the appropriate firmware file.

  •   SEPAAAABBBBCCCC.cnf.xml: This is the device-specific X M L configuration file ( A A A A B B B B C C C C is the
      MAC address of the phone), which specifies the IP address, port, firmware, locale, directory URL, and many other
      pieces of information. This file is created when the IP Phone has been added to the configuration.

  • XMLDefault.cnf.xml: This is the X M L configuration file that devices use if their specific SEP<MAC> file is not
      available (typically if they have not registered before or if they have been factory reset).

These files are downloaded by the phone during its boot process.



Power over Ethernet
Power over Ethernet (PoE) is a desirable option because it eliminates the cost and clutter of power bricks for the IP
Phones. There are two methods of PoE delivery:

  •   Cisco prestandard (inline power)

  •   802.3af standard

Extra care should be taken to ensure the following:

  •   RJ-45 cabling is tested and meets the required standard.

  •   The IP Phone and the switch have a common PoE delivery method.

  •   The PoE switch has a suitable UPS backup to provide power continuance in the event of a power failure.

                      © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Alternatively, each IP Phone may be powered by its own cable and transformer, or a variety of power injectors are avail-
able.

The Cisco prestandard PoE method works as follows:

 1. The switch sends a special tone, called a Fast Link Pulse (FLP), out of the port. The F L P goes to the powered
    device, in this case an IP phone.

 2. When unpowered, the PoE device has a physical link between the pin on which the F L P arrives and a pin that goes
    back to the switch. This creates a circuit, resulting in the FLP arriving back at the switch. Non-PoE devices will not
    have this link; the switch will therefore never receive the FLP from a device that does not require PoE.

 3. When the switch receives the returning FLP, it applies power to the line.

 4. The link comes up within 5 seconds.

 5. The powered device (IP phone) boots.

 6. Using CDP, the IP Phone tells the switch exactly how much power it needs. (Power requirements vary from device
    to device.)

The 802.3af PoE standard works slightly differently. The standard requires that all eight pins in the RJ-45 cable be
present and punched down. The following describes the 802.3af PoE negotiation steps:

 1. The switch applies constant DC power to all ports that may require PoE.

 2. An 802.3af-compliant device will apply 25 ohms resistance across the DC circuit.

 3. The switch detects the resistance and applies low-power PoE to the link.

 4. The powered device (the phone) boots.

 5. The phone uses C D P to specify its power needs.




                    © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Q u a l i t y of S e r v i c e
Quality of service (QoS) is possibly the single most important feature to deploy to ensure a successful VoIP system. This
section defines and describes why QoS is needed and explains how to configure and deploy a QoS solution using both the
Modular QoS Command Line (MQC) and AutoQoS.



QoS Definition
QoS is defined as

  The ability of the network to provide better or "special" service to a set of users and applications at the expense of other users and
  applications.

Voice and video traffic is very sensitive to delayed packets, lost packets, and variable delay (jitter). The effects of these
problems manifest as choppy audio, missing sounds, echo, or unacceptably long pauses in the conversation that cause
overlap, or one talker interrupting the other. QoS configurations provide bandwidth guarantees while minimizing delay
and jitter for priority traffic like VoIP. They do so not by creating additional bandwidth, but by controlling how the avail-
able bandwidth is used by the different applications and protocols on the network. In effect, this often means that data
applications and protocols are restricted from accessing bandwidth when VoIP traffic needs it. This does not have much of
an impact on the data traffic, however, because it is generally not as delay or drop-sensitive as VoIP traffic.

The areas that QoS can address to improve and guarantee voice quality are the following:

  •   Bandwidth

  •   Delay (including delay variation or jitter)

  •   Packet loss




                      © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Bandwidth
A VoIP call follows a single path from end to end. That path may include a variety of L A N and WAN links. The slowest
link represents the available bandwidth for the entire path—often referred to as a bottleneck because of the congestion the
slow link can cause.

If congestion is occurring, there are several ways to fix the problem:

  • Increase the bandwidth: If bandwidth is unlimited, congestion cannot occur. Realistically, however, increasing
    bandwidth is costly and is usually unnecessary if QoS is applied instead.

  •   Queuing: QoS employs advanced queuing strategies, which classify different traffic types and organize the classes
      into queues that are emptied in order of priority. The queuing strategies commonly used in Cisco Unified
      Communications include the following:

        • Weighted fair queuing (WFQ): W F Q dynamically assigns bandwidth to traffic flows as they arrive at the
          router interface. No configuration is necessary; the strategy is enabled by default on router links of Tl speed
          and below. This strategy is not appropriate for VoIP because it does not provide a bandwidth guarantee for the
          voice traffic, but instead allocates bandwidth fairly based on flow sizes (hence the name). VoIP needs a Priority
          queue (PQ) that guarantees it the bandwidth it needs, at the expense of all other traffic.

        •   Class-based weighted fair queuing (CBWFQ): C B W F Q extends the W F Q algorithm to include user-defined
            classes for traffic. Instead of the router dynamically interpreting traffic flows and building queues for them, the
            admin classifies the traffic and assigns it to queues of configurable size and bandwidth allocation. There is still
            no priority queue, however, so C B W F Q is not appropriate for VoIP.

        • Low-latency queuing (LLQ): L L Q extends the C B W F Q system with the addition of a PQ. The PQ is typically
          reserved for voice traffic, and if any packets show up in the PQ, all packets in the queue are immediately sent
          while packets of other traffic types are held in their respective queues. This is the preferred queuing method for
          VoIP networks.




                       © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
•   Compression: Several strategies are available to make the data that needs to be sent smaller so that it consumes less
      bandwidth:

        •   Payload compression: By compacting the contents of a packet, the total size is somewhat reduced. This
            compression method does not affect the headers, which makes it appropriate for links that require the header to
            be readable to route the packet correctly (Frame Relay and ATM as examples).

        •   Link compression: On point-to-point links where the header information is not needed to route the packet, link
            compression may be used.

        • Header compression: By specifying the use of compressed RTP (cRTP), the Layer 3 and 4 headers of a VoIP
            packet are dramatically reduced, from 40 to as little as 2 bytes. T C P header compression is also available for
            non-VoIP traffic using T C P transport.

Compression takes time and CPU resources, adding delay; this must be factored in to the decision of what strategies are
appropriate for a given link.



Delay
Reducing end-to-end delay is a primary goal of QoS. Delay is calculated by adding the cumulative delay totals from
source to destination and will be expressed as one-way or round-trip. Delay is classified in the following ways:

  •   Fixed delay is predictable and constant. Sources of fixed delay include the following:

        •   Propagation delay: The amount of time it takes for the signal to transit the link. This is effectively the speed of
            light as it moves through copper or optical media. Light travels just less than a foot in one-billionth of a second,
            so long-distance links can impose significant delay that cannot be eliminated. L.A. to New York links routinely
            see 40 ms one-way propagation delay.




                       © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
• Serialization delay: This is the time it takes to load bits onto the media; this relates directly to the speed of the
          link and cannot be altered unless that speed is changed.

  •   Variable delay includes processing and queuing delays; these will vary depending on the traffic load, the router
      performance, and many other factors that are not easily predictable or constant.

Minimizing delay employs the same strategies as improving bandwidth:

  •   Increase link speed.

  •   Use Priority queuing (such as LLQ) for delay-sensitive traffic.

  •   Employ appropriate compression techniques.



Packet Loss
Ideally, no packets of any type will be lost, but this is not realistic. We do need to minimize packet loss for VoIP traffic
because it has no mechanism to retransmit lost packets (unlike TCP, for example). Packets are lost for a variety of
reasons:

  •   Tail drop: When an output queue is full, no more arriving packets can be placed in the queue. Any packets that
      arrive when the queue is full are dropped from the last position (tail) of the queue and cannot be recovered. This is
      the most common source of packet loss.

  • Input drop: If the input queue fills up, arriving packets are dropped and lost. This is rare, and it usually indicates an
    overloaded router CPU.

  •   Overrun: Also the result of CPU congestion, overruns happen when the router cannot assign the packet to a free
      buffer space.




                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
• Ignore: There is no buffer space available.

  •   Frame errors: Problems in transmission created CRC errors, giant or runt frames. This is usually related to EMI or
      failing interface hardware.

Minimizing loss can be achieved with QoS mechanisms like LLQ and compression or by increasing link speed. Some
additional and complementary strategies known as Link Efficiency mechanisms will help to prevent congestion:

  • Traffic shaping: Delays packets and sends them at a configured maximum rate. For example, if an F T P server is
    generating a 512 kbps stream, shaping could limit the output to 256 kbps, delaying the transmission of the excess
    traffic. This will add significant delay and might cause packets to be dropped, so it is not desirable to shape VoIP
    traffic, but shaping data traffic is an effective tool to complement voice QoS settings.

  •   Traffic policing: Drops packets in excess of a configured threshold. These packets may be retransmitted if the traffic
      is using TCP, but because VoIP does not, policing should not be applied to VoIP traffic. Again, policing is an effec-
      tive complement to QoS configurations.



QoS Requirements for VoIP
There are some accepted targets for delay, loss, and jitter for VoIP traffic. These are the targets that QoS and Link
Efficiency mechanisms help us reach:

  •   Delay should be less than 150 ms one way.

  •   Jitter (the variation in the delay between packets) should be less than 30 ms one way.

  •   Packet loss should be less than 1 percent.

  •   Each VoIP call requires between 17 kbps and 106 kbps of priority bandwidth, depending on the codec, compression,
      and Layer 2 in use; it also requires another 150 bps per call for signaling traffic.




                      © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
• The requirements for video are similar; bandwidth consumption is calculated as [video codec output] + 20 percent.
     For example: a typical 384 kbps video stream should be allocated 460 kbps of priority bandwidth.




QoS Requirements for Data Traffic
Although data requirements are not as strict as those of VoIP, it is appropriate to classify the enterprise data traffic into
four or five classes and assign each a certain amount of bandwidth in its particular queue. The Cisco QoS classification
tools include Network-Based Application Recognition (NBAR), which makes it simple to classify traffic that would
otherwise be difficult or impossible.

The classifications you create will compose the QoS policy for the organization. The policy will reflect the actual needs
of both voice and data traffic on the network and will be a living document that will adapt to changes in the organization
and the applications it uses for business. A QoS policy is developed using the following process:

  1. Perform a network audit to determine the current state of traffic on the network. Determine whether congestion prob-
     lems already exist, and list all applications discovered in current use.

 2. Perform a business audit to determine where the applications in use fit into the business model. Some apps will be
    characterized as critical to the business, some as routine, and some as trivial or perhaps even undesirable. It is not
    uncommon to discover that the business executive had no idea some apps were in use, and a decision needs to be
    made about how to treat all applications discovered, legitimate or otherwise.

 3. Determine the level of service required for each app. This will range from Priority for voice and video, through
    Mission Critical, Urgent, Routine and Scavenger, and even Disallowed. The names are not important; the ones used
    here serve only to identify the relative importance of the apps as they are classified. Every business audit will gener-
    ate a slightly different picture of what is vital to the business and what is to be disallowed.




                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
4. Build the classification scheme to match the audit findings. Use the business audit and the executive's decisions to
    create a classification scheme that lines up with the business needs.

 5. Define the QoS settings for each traffic class. This may include a minimum and maximum bandwidth allocation, a
    priority for each class, queuing strategies, and link efficiency methods, as appropriate.



AutoQoS
QoS configuration is one of the more advanced skills in the IOS CLI environment. Although it is essentially simple in
architecture, the many commands needed are intimidating and time consuming. AutoQoS is a feature available on voice-
enabled IOS platforms to greatly simplify and automate QoS configurations. AutoQoS generates traffic classes and
service policies using predefined templates, making an in-depth understanding of the commands unnecessary. In any envi-
ronment where there is a lack of skill or time, AutoQoS is a benefit. The autogenerated configuration adapts to changes
(such as the relocation of an IP Phone) and is manually customizable to meet specific requirements after the automated
config is completed. Auto QoS is available on all voice-enabled routers and switches with the correct IOS feature set.
Router AutoQoS is limited to the following interfaces:

  •   Serial PPP or H D L C links

  •   Frame Relay point-to-point links only

  •   ATM PVCs, both low- and high-speed


QoS Trust Boundary
One of the important concepts in QoS is the trust boundary—the point at which the QoS marking of a packet or frame is
believed by the switch or router. If it is trusted, the packet is treated according to the QoS marking and corresponding
policy. If it is not trusted, it may be re-marked and treated differently.

Ideally, we want to place the trust boundary as close to the source (the devices generating the traffic) as possible. This
means that the trust boundary should actually be between the IP Phone and the attached PC, because generally we do not


                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
trust the PC, but we do trust the phone. If there is no phone, the trust boundary is between the switch and the PC. The
switch must be able to recognize and configure the trust boundary; if it cannot, we must move the boundary up to the
gateway router.

AutoQoS can automatically detect and configure the trust boundary by sensing a connected Cisco IP Phone and applying
the necessary QoS commands.



Configuring AutoQoS
The single command auto qos voip [trust] [fr-atm] enables AutoQoS at the interface. The keyword trust causes the
DSCP markings of packets to be trusted for classification purposes. If trust is not configured, traffic is classified using
NBAR, and the packets are D S C P marked as appropriate. The fr-atm keyword is used on Frame Relay and ATM point-
to-point links. The AutoQoS configurations are based on the configured bandwidth of the interface when AutoQoS is first
run; lowering the bandwidth after AutoQoS is run will not change the AutoQoS configurations, so AutoQoS must be
removed and reapplied if the bandwidth statement is changed.

On a switch interface, the keyword [ciscophone] enables the trusted boundary feature when the switch detects a Cisco
phone through its CDP messages. When a phone is detected, the QoS marking of packets is trusted; when no phone is
detected, the markings are not trusted.

Using the [trust] keyword on a switch interface causes the inbound QoS marking of packets to be trusted regardless of
whether a phone is detected.




                    © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
I n t r o d u c i n g Cisco U n i f i e d C o m m u n i c a t i o n s
M a n a g e r Express
Unified CM Express is a router-based call agent that scales up to 240 phones, depending on platform capacity. The
system extends the benefits of Unified Communications to small businesses.

Unified CM Express supports a wide range of TP Phone, system, and trunk features, as well as voice-mail integration with
Unity, Unity Express, and third-party systems using H.323 or analog D T M F signaling. For a complete feature list, refer to
the Unified Communications Manager Express 4.2 Data Sheets on cisco.com.

Unified CM Express runs on the ISR platforms, including the 2800 and 3800 series, and on the 3700 series Multiservice
Access Routers. The appropriate IOS IP Voice feature set, along with IP Phone licenses and firmware, and flash and
R A M appropriate for the install are required. The optional GUI files may be installed for simplified configuration and
administration but are not required.

Unified CM Express supports all current-generation IP Phones.



Defining Ephone and Ephone-DN
An ephone is an Ethernet phone, and an ephone-dn is an Ethernet phone directory number. In CM Express, an ephone is a
logical configuration and settings for a physical phone, and the ephone-dn is a destination number that can be assigned to
multiple ephones.

An ephone-dn always has a primary directory number, and it may have a secondary one as well. When you create an
ephone-dn, you can specify it as single line (the default) or dual line. A single line can terminate one call; a dual line can
terminate two calls at the same time. This is necessary for call waiting, consultative transfer, and conferencing features
to work. When you create an ephone-dn, the router automatically creates POTS dial peers to match. The following




                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
configuration creates a dual-line ephone-dn with a primary and secondary number. The number 20 in the configuration is
the tag, which is simply a unique identifier:

Router(config)#ephone-dn 20 d u a l - l i n e
R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - e p h o n e - d n ) # n u m b e r 5309 secondary 8675309


There is a maximum number of ephone-dns that a given platform will support; this is controlled by the hardware capacity
and by licensing. The max-dn <max-dn-value> command must be set to create ephone-dns; the default is zero. Be aware
that the router immediately reserves memory for the number of dns you specify, whether they are created or not; you
should configure only what you will actually need.

An ephone is the logical configuration of a physical phone. Each ephone is given a tag to uniquely identify it. The MAC
address of the phone ties it to the ephone configuration. CM Express will detect all phone models except the 7914
sidecar, which must be specified manually. Each different model of IP Phone has a different number of buttons, to which
various functions can be applied; the top button is always numbered " 1 , " with the others following in numerical order.
The button command allows you to specify which button does what. The following configuration creates a basic ephone
for a 7960 with a 7914 sidecar; the button 1:20 command assigns button 1 the dn (5309) assigned to ephone-dn 20 from
the previous example:

r o u t e r ( c o n f i g ) # ephone 20
r o u t e r ( c o n f i g - e p h o n e ) # mac-address AAAA.BBBB.CCCC
r o u t e r ( c o n f i g - e p h o n e ) # t y p e 7960 addon 1 7914
router(config-ephone)#              button     1:20



Types of ephone-dns
Six types of ephone-dns are configurable in CM Express:

  • Single line: This ephone-dn creates a single virtual port. Although you can specify a secondary number, the phone
    can terminate only one call at a time, so it cannot support call waiting. It should be used when there is one phone




                              © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
button for each PSTN line that comes into the system. It is useful for things like paging, intercom, call-park slots,
    M o H feeds, and MWI.
    Router(config)#ephone-dn 1
    Router(config-ephone-dn)#number         1001


• Dual line: The dual-line ephone-dn can support two call terminations at the same time and can have a primary and a
  secondary number. It should be used when a single button supports call features like call waiting, transfer, and
  conferencing. It should not be used for lines dedicated to intercom, paging, M o H feeds, MWI, or call park. It can be
  used in combination with single-line ephone-dns on the same phone.
    Router(config)#ephone-dn 2 d u a l - l i n e
    Router(config-ephone-dn)#number         1002


• Dual number: This ephone-dn has a primary and secondary number, making it possible to dial two separate
  numbers to reach the phone. It can be either a single- or dual-line ephone-dn; it should be used when you want to
  have two numbers for the same button without using more than one ephone-dn.

•   Shared ephone-dn: The same ephone-dn and number appears on two separate phones as a shared line, meaning that
    either phone can use the line, but once in use the other cannot then make calls on that line. The line will ring on all
    phones that share the ephone-dn, but only one can pick up. If the call is placed on hold, any one of the other phones
    sharing the line can pick it up.

• Multiple ephone-dns on one or more ephones: This configuration allows multiple calls to the same extension to be
  handled simultaneously on a single phone; for example, using three dual-line ephone-dns with the same number will
  terminate six calls on the phone. By using multiple ephone-dns on multiple phones, all the phones can answer the
  same number. This is not a shared line because the phones will ring in succession, and a call on hold can be
  answered only by the phone that placed it on hold. Controlling the hunting behavior (the order in which buttons or
  phones ring) is done with the preference and huntstop commands, as explained in the "Hunting Configuration"
  section that follows.




                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
• Overlay ephone-dn: An overlay consists of two or more ephone-dns (up to 25) applied to the same button; all these
     ephone-dns must be either single or dual line. (You can't mix the types.) The call coverage is similar to a shared-line
     setup, except that a call to the number on one phone does not block the use of the same number on another phone.
     You can overlay up to 10 lines on a single button and then configure the same overlay set on 10 phones, with the
     result that all 10 phones could answer calls to the same number. The button command with the overlay separator
     creates the overlay set. The overlay separator can be o, which designates an overlay set without call waiting, or c,
     which designates call waiting. The command button lo30,31>32,33,34,35                      c o n   fjg   u r e s   ephone-dns 30, 3 1 , 32, 33, 34,
     and 35 on button 1 without call waiting.



Hunting Configuration
Hunting allows a call to search for an available line to ring. This is commonly used in environments where call coverage
is needed to answer the same number, such as a call center or help desk. The preference command sets the order in
which the call will be tried on a list of ephone-dns; the huntstop command stops the hunting when it reaches that
ephone-dn; from this point, it is typical to send the call to voice mail.

The default is huntstop enabled. This can prevent calls from rolling over to the next ephone-dn, so the no huntstop
command must be used to allow the desired hunting behavior.

If dual-line ephone-dns are configured, the default behavior is for the call to hunt from the first line to the second. This
causes the same phone to ring twice for the same call.

The following configuration creates an ephone with two ephone-dns that both terminate calls to 1003. The huntstop
configuration sends calls to the first channel of ephone-dn 3, then the second channel of ephone-dn 3, then the first
channel of ephone-dn 4, then the second channel of ephone-dn 4.

Router(config)#ephone-dn 3 d u a l - l i n e
Router(config-ephone-dn)#number         1003
Router(config-ephone-dn)#preference            0
Router(config-ephone-dn)#no        huntstop



                       © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Router(config)#ephone-dn 4 d u a l - l i n e
Router(config-ephone-dn)#number           1003
Router(config-ephone-dn)#preference                 1
Router(config-ephone-dn)#huntstop
Router(config)#ephone 3
Router(config-ephone)#mac-address           AAAA.BBBB.CCCC
Router(config-ephone)#button        1:3    2:4


This is not necessarily the behavior we want; it is more common to use the second channel of an ephone-dn for transfer,
call waiting, or conferencing. We can force the call to hunt from channel 1 of the first ephone-dn directly to channel 1 of
the second ephone-dn instead, using the hunststop channel command. The following configuration will send the call
from channel 1 of ephone-dn 5 (on button 2) to channel 1 of ephone-dn 6 (on button 3), then to channel 2 of ephone-dn 6
(also on button 3):
Router(config)#ephone-dn 5 d u a l - l i n e
Router(config-ephone-dn#number          1004
Router(config-ephone-dn#preference              0
Router(config-ephone-dn#huntstop           channel
Router(config)#ephone-dn 6 d u a l - l i n e
Router(config-ephone-dn#number          1004
Router(config-ephone-dn#preference              1
Router(config-ephone-dn#no       huntstop           channel
Router(config)#ephone 4
Router(config-ephone#mac-address          AAAA.BBBB.CCCC
Router(config-ephone#button       2:5     3:6


In a call-coverage scenario, we would want the call to hunt to an agent who is not already on the phone. Here we config-
ure the call to hunt from channel 1 on the first phone to channel 1 on the second phone:

Router(config)#ephone-dn 5 d u a l - l i n e
Router(config-ephone-dn#number          1004



                       © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Router(config-ephone-dn#preference              0
Router(config-ephone-dn#huntstop           channel
Router(config)#ephone-dn 6 d u a l - l i n e
Router(config-ephone-dn#number           1004
Router(config-ephone-dn#preference              1
Router(config-ephone-dn#huntstop           channel
Router(config)#ephone 4
Router(config-ephone#mac-address           AAAA.BBBB.CCCC
Router(config-ephone#button        2:5
Router(config)#ephone 5
Router(config-ephone#mac-address           DDDD.EEEE.FFFF
Router(config-ephone#button        2:6




                       © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
C o n f i g u r i n g C M Express t o S u p p o r t Endpoints
In this section we explore three methods of configuring endpoints on a CM Express system: configuring optional settings,
rebooting IP Phones, and troubleshooting and verifying the configuration.



Providing Firmware
IP Phone firmware files ship with the CM Express software or can be downloaded from cisco.com. For the router to serve
the firmware to the phones, the tftp-server fiashifilename command is used. You must enter this command for every
firmware file needed. Some phones require more than one file to be loaded—for example, the 791 IG requires six separate
files.



Telephony Service Configuration
Manual setup of the CM Express system is done using the CLI. From the global config, the command telephony-service
enables config-telephony mode. This prompt is where your first steps of defining the max-ephones and max-ephone-dn
settings (described earlier) would take place.


Phone Firmware Loads
The firmware files that were copied into Flash and made available to the phones via T F T P must be associated with the
phones; this is done using the load model firmware-file command. Filenames are case sensitive, and the file extension
should not be included in the command. (Tip: Use the Cut-and-Paste function of your terminal client to prevent annoying
typos!) For Java-based phones, it is only necessary to load the TERMnn.x-y-x-w.loads or SCCPnn.x-y-x-w.loads
firmware filename (without the .loads extension), although the other files must be available via TFTP. The following is a
sample command set:

l o a d 7960-7940 P00303020214
l o a d 7920 c m t e r m _ 7 9 2 0 . 4 . 0 - 0 1 - 0 8
l o a d 7941 TERM41.7-0-3-0S


                                 © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Defining Source IP and Port
The CM Express software uses SCCP to communicate with the phones. (SIP signaling is also possible but is not covered
in this document.) The command ip source-address ip-address [port port] defines the IP address of the router that will
be used as the source for SCCP messages. The default SCCP TCP port is 2000 and does not normally need to be
changed, but the option is available if the situation should require it.


Autoregistration
The autoregistration function is enabled by default; this allows a phone to be discovered and registered to an available
ephone slot (provided the ip source-address command is configured). The command no auto-reg-ephone prevents a
phone from registering unless its MAC address is explicitly configured already. CM Express records the MACs of all
phones that attempt to register but are blocked by autoregistration being disabled; use the show ephone
attempted-registrations command to see the list and the clear telephony-service ephone attempted-registrations
command to see and clear the list.


Create XML Config Files
The create cnf-files command takes the configurations (including the firmware load, the source IP address, and port we
just defined) and builds an X M L config file for each phone. This is a necessary step, and one that you may repeat from
time to time, for example, if you upgrade firmware or make other changes to the phone configuration.


DID Configurations
It is common to have a range of DID numbers (fully qualified E.164 numbers) that allow outside callers to reach internal
extensions directly; usually, the DIDs have the four-digit internal extension as the last four digits. CM Express supports
this configuration with the dialplan-pattern command. This function expands extension numbers to full E.164 numbers
and converts incoming E.164 numbers to local extensions. The command is also needed to register the range of numbers
the command specifies with a gatekeeper; in fact, once configured, the range is automatically registered if a gatekeeper
is configured. You can disable this with the no-reg keyword. The full syntax is dialplan-pattern tag pattern



                    © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
extension-length length e x t e n s i o n - p a t t e r n pattern [no-reg]. The pattern uses the same wildcards as dial peers. A
sample configuration to set up a dial plan pattern for extensions 5300-5399 and expand them to the DID range of
867-555-5300-867-555-5399 would look like this:

telephony-service
dialplan-pattern 1         86755553.. e x t e n s i o n - l e n g t h 4 extension p a t t e r n 5 3 . .



Automated Deployment of Endpoints
In some cases, it is desirable to automate the deployment of phones. The telephony-service auto-assign command will
dynamically create ephones as physical phones are connected to the system, assigning an available ephone-dn to the
ephone. The ephone-dns must all be the same type (that is, single line or dual line). You must have a range of ephone-dns
configured, but it is no longer necessary to create each ephone and associate it manually.

The auto assign start-dn to stop-dn [type phone-type] [cfw number timeout seconds] command syntax specifies the
range of ephone-dns to use for a given phone model, the Call Forward Busy number to use (typically the voice-mail port),
and timeout values. You can enter multiple commands to specify ranges for your different phone types; if no phone type
is specified, any phone that registers will be assigned an ephone-dn from the specified range. The 7914 sidecar is not
supported by this command; phones with this add-on must have it manually added. The auto-assign cannot be used for
ephone-dns that serve paging, MoH, intercom or M W I functions. Nor can it be used for shared-line implementations.
Changes must be performed manually at the CLI, followed by resetting the affected phones. The following is a sample of
how the command can be used:

telephony-service
a u t o a s s i g n 11 to 20 t y p e 7920
a u t o a s s i g n 21 to 30 t y p e 7940
a u t o a s s i g n 31 to 40 t y p e 7960
a u t o a s s i g n 41 to 50


ephone-dn 1 d u a l - l i n e
number 5301



                           © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
The preceding output assigns ephone-dns from 11 to 20 to 7920s, 21 to 30 to 7940s, 31 to 40 to 7960s, and 41 to 50 to
any other type of phone (including those already specified, if there are no more ephone-dns in their range).


Location Customization
CM Express supports phone display language, time display, and ring cadence localization. The user-locale language-
code command will change the language displayed on all 7940 and 7960 phones; the 7920 is not affected and must be
configured with its individual language capability local to the phone. The network-locale language-code command will
change the call progress tones and ring cadence (again with the exception of the 7920).

Following are language codes supported for User Locale:

  •   DE: Germany

  •   DK: Denmark

  • ES: Spain

  •   FR: France

  •   IT: Italy

  • NL: Netherlands

  •   NO: Norway

  •   PT: Portugal

  •   RU: Russian Federation

  •   SE: Sweden

  •   US: United States (default)

  •   JA:Japan




                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Following are language codes supported for Network Locale:

  • AT: Austria

  •   CA: Canada

  •   CH: Switzerland

  •   DE: Germany

  •   DK: Denmark

  • ES: Spain

  •   FR: France

  •   GB: United Kingdom

  •   IT: Italy

  •   JA: Japan

  • NL: Netherlands

  •   NO: Norway

  •   PT: Portugal

  •   RU: Russian Federation

  •   SE: Sweden

  •   US: United States (default)

To change the time display format, use the time-format {12 I 24} command. To change the date format, use date-format
{mm-dd-yy I dd-mm-yy I yy-dd-mm I yy-mm-dd}.




                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Rebooting IP Phones
There are two commands available to reboot IP Phones, each with a slightly different behavior. The reset command
causes a hard reboot of the phone and invokes D H C P and TFTP. Use reset when changing firmware, user/network
locales, or URLs. The reset command can be executed to reset a single phone at the config-ephone prompt, or at the
config-telephony prompt to reset one or more phones. The full syntax is reset {all [time-interval] I cancel I mac-address
Isequence-all}. The command options work as follows:

  • all: Resets all phones.

  • time-interval: Changes the interval between the router resetting the phones in sequence (default = 15sec).

  • cancel: Stops the reset process.

  • mac-address: Resets a specific phone.

  •   sequence-all: The router waits for one phone to reset and reregister before resetting the next phone to prevent the
      phones from overloading the T F T P server. This can be time consuming; the router waits 4 minutes as a timeout
      before resetting the next phone, whether or not the reregistration of the previous has finished.

The restart command causes a soft (warm) reboot and is useful for minor configuration changes, such as buttons, lines,
and speed-dial modifications. This command can also be executed either at the config-ephone prompt or at the config-
telephony prompt. The syntax is restart {all [time-interval] I mac-address}, with the command parameters the same as
the reset command.



Troubleshooting Endpoints
Check the following when troubleshooting:

  •   Verify IP addressing: Use the Settings button on the phone to check the configuration of the IP phone. The TFTP
      Server IP should be the CM Express router.



                      © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
• Verify the files in flash memory: Verify that the correct firmware files are in the flash memory of the Cisco Unified
  Communications Manager Express router using the show flash command.

• Debug the T F T P server: Use debug tftp events to ensure that the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
  Express router is correctly providing the firmware and X M L files.

• Verify the firmware installation of the phones: Use the debug ephone register command to verify which
  firmware is being installed.

• Verify that the locale is correct: Use the show telephony-service tftp-bindings command to view the files that the
  TFTP server is providing.

• Verify the phone setup: Use the show ephone command to view the status of the ephones and whether they are
  registered correctly.

• Review the configuration: Use the show running-config command to verify the ephone-dn configuration.




                  © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
I m p l e m e n t i n g Basic V o i c e F e a t u r e s
A business phone system is expected to provide the following features:

  •   Music on Hold

  •   Call Forward

  •   Call Transfer

  •   Call Park

  •   Intercom

  •   Paging

  •   Call Pickup

  •   Call Blocking

  •   Directory Services

The next sections describe the configuration of these basic business telephony features in CM Express.



Music on Hold
No one likes to be on hold, but having something to listen to makes it a little better and can even relay useful information
to the listener. Configuring Music on Hold (MOH) in CM Express is simple. First copy a .wav file to Flash (avoiding
copyright issues by using royalty-free recordings). Next, issue the command moh wavefilename.wav in config-telephony
mode. By default, the router will multicast the stream to 239.23.4.10:2000; if you need to change this default multicast
address (typically you do not), issue the command multicast m o h ip-address port port-number.




                      © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Call Forward
The user can configure call-forwarding of all calls using the phone softkey. Using the CLI, you can configure different
call-forwarding options at the config-ephone-dn prompt:

  •   call-forward all directory-number: Forwards all calls to the specified directory number.

  •   call-forward busy directory-number: Forwards calls to the specified number if the user is on the phone.

  • call-forward noan directory-number timeout seconds: Forwards calls to the specified directory number if the user
    does not answer the phone before the specified timeout.

  • call-forward maxlength length: Restricts the number of digits specified for the call-forwarding number; this
      prevents call forwarding to an international long-distance number, for example.



Call Transfer
Users can transfer calls with the Transfer softkey; the administrator can configure how this transfer happens using the
transfer-system {blind I full-blind I full-consult llocal-consult} config-telephony command. The command options are
as follows:

  • Blind: Calls are transferred immediately using a Cisco-proprietary method.

  • Full-blind: Calls are transferred immediately using the H.450.2 standard.

  • Full-consult: Calls are transferred with consultation (meaning the user must speak to the target of the transfer before
    the call is released); uses the H.450.2 standard.

  • Local-consult: Uses a proprietary transfer method; not commonly used.




                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Call Park
Call park allows a user to hold a call but retrieve it from another location by dialing the call park extension. A call-park
extension is a "floating" ephone-dn that is not assigned to any ephone. Multiple calls can be parked at a single extension
and are retrieved by dialling the extension; calls are picked up in the order in which they were parked. The syntax is rela-
tively complex and specifies several options:

  •   park-slot [reserved-for extension-number] [timeout seconds limit count] [notify extension-number [only]] [recall]
      [transfer extension-number][alternate extension-number][retry seconds limit count].

  •   reserved-for: (Optional) Indicates that this slot is a private park slot for the phone with the specified extension
      number as its primary line. All lines on that phone can use this park slot.

  • timeout seconds: (Optional) Sets the Call Park reminder timeout interval, in seconds. The range is from 0 to 65535.
    When the interval expires, the Call Park reminder sends a 1-second ring and displays a message on the L C D panel of
    the Cisco IP Phone that parked the call and to any extension that is specified with the notify keyword. By default,
    the reminder ring is sent only to the phone that parked the call. If the timeout keyword is not used, no reminder ring
    is sent to the extension that parked the call.

  • limit count: (Optional) Sets a limit for the number of reminder timeouts and reminder rings for a parked call. For
    example, a limit of 10 sends 10 reminder rings to the phone at intervals that are specified by the timeout keyword.
    When a limit is set, a call parked at this slot is disconnected after the limit has been reached. The limit range is from
    1 to 65535 reminders.

  • notify extension-number: (Optional) Sends a reminder ring to the specified extension in addition to the reminder
    ring that is sent to the phone that parked the call.
  • only: (Optional) Sends a reminder ring only to the extension that is specified with the notify keyword and does not
    send a reminder ring to the phone that parked the call. This option allows all reminder rings for parked calls to be
    sent to the phone of a receptionist or an attendant, for example.

  • recall: (Optional) Returns the call to the phone that parked it after the timeout limits expire.



                      © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
• transfer: (Optional) Returns the call to the specified number after the timeout limits expire.

   • alternate: (Optional) Returns the call to a specified second target number if the recall or transfer target phone is in
     use on any of its extensions (ringing or in conversation).

   •   retry seconds: (Optional) Sets the delay before another attempt to recall or transfer a parked call, in seconds. The
       range is from 0 to 65535. The number of attempts is set by the limit keyword.

The following example creates four call-park slots. Ephone-dn 10 and 11 can be used by any extension. A call parked in
these slots will stay parked for 100 seconds and will send a notification every 10 seconds to the extension that parked it.
If the 100-second limit elapses, the parked call is automatically transferred to 5309; if 5309 is busy or does not answer, it
goes to 5310. Ephone-dn 12 and 13 are reserved for 5301 and 5302, respectively. After a call has been parked for 100
seconds, it will be disconnected.

ephone-dn 10
number 7000
p a r k - s l o t t i m e o u t 1 0 l i m i t 1 0 t r a n s f e r 5309 a l t e r n a t e 5310
ephone-dn 11
number 7001
p a r k - s l o t t i m e o u t 1 0 l i m i t 1 0 t r a n s f e r 5309 a l t e r n a t e 5310
ephone-dn 12
number 7002
p a r k - s l o t t i m e o u t 1 0 l i m i t 1 0 r e s e r v e d - f o r 5301
ephone-dn 13
number 7003
p a r k - s l o t t i m e o u t 1 0 l i m i t 1 0 r e s e r v e d - f o r 5302




                               © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Intercom
An intercom is a one-way audio speed-dial. Commonly used by an executive to an admin assistant, it allows the user to
press a phone button and be directly connected to another user. The destination phone answers the call in muted speaker-
phone mode so that privacy is maintained. Any user could dial the intercom if the extension is known. To make it impos-
sible for anyone to dial the intercom (except those phones configured to do so), the extension number of the intercom can
include the A, B, C, or D character. These characters were at one time part of the touchtone dialpad, but because they are
no longer on the phone itself, users cannot dial them; it is still possible to configure them in an ephone-dn, however. The
following configuration shows a typical intercom configuration, using the B digit as part of the intercom extension
number:

ephone-dn 10
number 5301
name "Tommy TuTone"
ephone-dn 20
number 5309
name "Jenny"
ephone-dn 51
number B5555
name "Tommy TuTone"
i n t e r c o m B5556 l a b e l "Tommy TuTone"
ephone-dn 52
number B5556
name "Jenny"
i n t e r c o m B5555 l a b e l   "Jenny"
ephone 6
button     1:10 2:51
ephone 7
button     1:20 2 : 5 2




                              © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Paging
Audio paging builds a one-way audio path from the speaker to a single phone, a group of phones, or combined groups of
phones. A paging group is created by configuring a dummy ephone-dn with the paging command and associating that
ephone-dn with one or more ephones using the paging-dn command. When a user dials the paging extension, all config-
ured phones answer the call in muted speakerphone mode. The default transport is unicast, which limits paging to a
maximum of 10 targets; multicast is also supported. The command syntax to create the ephone-dn is the following:

Router(config-ephone-dn)#                  paging    [ip   multicast-address    port   udp-port]


The following shows the syntax for associating an ephone to the paging ephone-dn. Note the unicast keyword, which will
override the multicast configuration if the phone is not reachable by multicast:

Router(config-ephone)#                paging-dn     paging-dn-tag   [unicast]


The following example sets up a single paging group:

ephone-dn 25
number 2525
name Paging S h i p p i n g
p a g i n g i p 2 3 9 . 0 . 1 . 2 5 p o r t 2000
ephone-dn 18
number 1818
ephone-dn 15
number 1515
ephone 1
mac-address AAAA.BBBB.CCCC
button      1:18
p a g i n g - d n 25
ephone 2




                              © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
mac-address            BBBB.CCCC.DDDD
button      1:15
p a g i n g - d n 25



Combining Paging Groups
The config-ephone-dn command paging-grouppaging-dn-tag, paging-dn-tag,... is used to create a combined paging
group from multiple, previously defined paging dns. This is useful to create a paging group that reaches all phones for
emergency use, or simply to combine other groups for paging.



Call Pickup
There are three variations of call pickup:

   • Directed call pickup: Any extension can pick up a call that is on hold on another directory number, without belong-
     ing to a pickup group.
   •   Group pickup: A user can pick up a call for another group if the user knows the group extension. If only one
       pickup group is defined, users need only press the Pickup softkey, whether or not they are a member of a pickup
       group.

   • Local group pickup: Users can pick up a ringing extension in their own group using the Pickup softkey plus the
       star key (*).

An ephone-dn is assigned to a pickup group with the command pickup-group number. The numbers are arbitrary, but
the leading characters must be unique to each group; for example, the group numbers 81 and 817 will both be interpreted


If the ringing extension is in the user's group, pressing the Pickup softkey will redirect the call to the user's phone. If the
ringing extension is in another group, the user must press the GPickup softkey and enter the group number of the ringing
extension.

                              © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Call Blocking
Call blocking prevents unauthorized use of phones, typically to specific number patterns or times of day. You can define
up to 32 patterns of digits to block and apply a time schedule to restrict calls to whatever schedule suits your needs. Call
blocking applies to all IP Phones (except analog FXS phones), but phones can be exempted from call blocking individu-
ally. An override function exists, configurable with a PIN for authorized users.

The schedule can be configured by day or by date using the following config-telephony commands:

a f t e r - h o u r s day day         start-time stop-time
a f t e r - h o u r s d a t e month d a t e s t a r t - t i m e s t o p - t i m e


When the after-hours schedule is in place, use the block command to activate call blocking:

after-hours            block       pattern         t a g pattern         [7-24]


The patterns use the same syntax as dial plan patterns. Using the 7-24 keyword blocks the configured pattern 24 hours a
day, 7 days a week, and disables the override PIN functionality.

The following configuration sets up a call blocking plan for all calls outside of normal business hours of 8:00 a.m. to 5:00
p.m., Monday through Sunday, and the holidays for New Year's day, the Fourth of July, and Christmas day:

Router(config)#telephony- service
R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - t e l e p h o n y ) # a f t e r - h o u r s day mon 1 7 : 0 0 0 8 : 0 0
R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - t e l e p h o n y ) # a f t e r - h o u r s day t u e    17:00 08:00
R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - t e l e p h o n y ) # a f t e r - h o u r s day wed 1 7 : 0 0 0 8 : 0 0
R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - t e l e p h o n y ) # a f t e r - h o u r s day t h u    17:00 08:00
R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - t e l e p h o n y ) # a f t e r - h o u r s day f r i    17:00 08:00
R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - t e l e p h o n y ) # a f t e r - h o u r s day    sat   17:00 08:00
R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - t e l e p h o n y ) # a f t e r - h o u r s day sun      17:00 08:00
R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - t e l e p h o n y ) # a f t e r - h o u r s date jan 1      00:00 00:00
R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - t e l e p h o n y ) # a f t e r - h o u r s date    j u l 4 00:00 00:00




                                    © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - t e l e p h o n y ) # a f t e r - h o u r s d a t e dec 25 0 0 : 0 0 0 0 : 0 0
Router(config-telephony)#after-hours block pattern 9011!
Router(config-telephony)#after-hours                             block      pattern       9011!#
Router(config-telephony)#after-hours                             block      pattern        91[2-9]..[2-9]
Router(config-telephony)#after-hours                             block      pattern       91900
Router(config-telephony)#after-hours                             block      pattern       91976
Router(config-telephony)#after-hours                             block      pattern        9[2-9]..[2-9]


Exempting a phone from after-hours blocking is easily configured with the after-hours exempt command at the config-
ephone prompt. Adding a PIN is equally simple at the same prompt with pin pin-number.



Directory Services
Users can access the list of numbers and names by pressing the Directory key. Directory entries are drawn from the
ephone-dn configuration if it includes a name entry. CM Express supports 100 directory entries of up to 32 characters,
with the name being up to 24 characters. The directory entries can be listed as first-name-first or last-name-first;
whichever method is chosen, the name under the ephone-dn configuration should match to avoid confusion. The config-
telephony command to specify how names in the directory shall be displayed is the following:

directory {first-name-first                      | last-name-first}


It is possible to configure a directory entry that is not an IP Phone. To create such an entry, use the following config-
telephony command:

d i r e c t o r y e n t r y { [ e n t r y - t a g number name name]              | clear}




                                  © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
M a i n t a i n i n g a CM Express S y s t e m
An IP Phone system needs regular attention to watch for unusual events or unhealthy trends. Day-to-day operations and
maintenance tasks include the following:

  •   Updating files on the router

  •   Configuring syslog logging

  •   Billing procedures

  •   Managing Call Detail Records (CDRs)

The next sections discuss these topics and configurations.



Managing Router Files
The CM Express router will need routine updates applied to improve reliability, add features, or enhance security.
Whether the files are upgrades to the Cisco IOS, the Communication Manager Express application or GUI, phone
firmware or M O H files, the command to load them into the router is the familiar copy tftp flash syntax. (The TFTP
server must be active and accessible over the network, of course.) FTP is also supported if file sizes greater than 32 MB
are to be moved; a suitable account and password must be configured for F T P transfers.

CM Express software is available as a bundled, single .zip file containing all the files needed to run CM Express, includ-
ing the GUI. This single file can be extracted on the TFTP/FTP server and the files downloaded to the router Flash
memory.




                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
SYSLOG and SNMP MIB Support
CM Express supports type 6 Syslog messages for IP Phone registration. After a Syslog server is configured using the
logging ip_address command and is available on the network, these messages can be viewed along with other messages
generated by the router, using the Syslog viewer of your choice. The following are the Syslog messages provided for IP
Phone registration events:

  •   %IPPHONE-6-REG_ALARM

  •   %IPPHONE-6-REGISTER

  •   %IPPHONE-6-REGISTER_NEW

  •   %IPPHONE-6-UNREGISTER_ABNORMAL

  •   %IPPHONE-6-UNREGISTER_NORMAL

S N M P allows network system administrators to monitor changes and events by way of messages sent to a monitoring
application. CM Express support for S N M P MIBs specific to IP telephony activities and events includes the following
three MIBs:

  •   Cisco-DIAL-CONTROL-MIB (CDR and call history)

  •   Cisco-VOICE-CONTROL-MIB (extends to telephony and VoIP dial peers and call legs)

  •   Cisco-VOICE-IF-MIB

These MIBs, along with CDR data, allow visibility into detailed information about both summary and specific call infor-
mation.




                    © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Billing Support
Billing support is provided by way of CDR records and H.323 start/stop time A A A messages to the syslog server or
billing application. If the user enters an account code using the Acct softkey during call setup or when the call is
connected, the account code is recorded in the C D R and added to the Cisco-VOICE-DIAL-CONTROL-MIB. The account
code can then be accessed by a billing application to determine how long a user was on the phone with each customer,
and billed accordingly.



Call Detail Records
Call Detail Records (CDR) are created by default and recorded in memory for later review and analysis using either the
CLI or GUI. CDRs can optionally be sent to the Syslog server.




                    © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
I m p l e m e n t i n g Cisco U n i t y Express
Unity Express is a richly featured voice-mail and auto-attendant application that is coresident in the router in either a
Network Module format or Advanced Integration Module format. Having a local voice-mail application is ideal for
smaller organizations as a standalone solution or to provide local voice-mail access in a branch office of a larger organi-
zation without having to send the traffic across the IP WAN if bandwidth utilization is an issue.

Cisco Unity Express supports up to 250 mailboxes (and 300 users), dependent on hardware platform. It can provide
voice-mail and integrated messaging, but not Unified Messaging. There is no provision for a T D M interface to a legacy
PBX voice-mail system (because the hardware is internal to the router), and there is no provision for redundancy. Unity
Express is actually an embedded Linux operating system, with an Ethernet interface to the router platform. (This interface
is not visible physically or in the router configuration.)

The following table summarizes the capacities of the three Unity Express hardware platforms.

Unity Express Hardware Capacities
Cisco Unity Express Module        Max. Mailboxes          Max. Sessions         Internal Card        Storage Device          Hours of Storage
CUE—AIM                           50                      4 or 6                Yes                  Flash                   14
CUE—NM                            100                     8                     No                   HDD                     300
CUE—NM-Enhanced                   250                     16                    No                   HDD                     300


Unity Express includes both a GUI and TUI interface, for initial mailbox setup as well as ongoing maintenance. The TUI
includes a tutorial to make it simple for users to set up their own mailboxes (or General Delivery boxes for group accessi-
ble mailboxes), eliminating much of the administrative overhead.

Some of the features offered by Unity Express include the following:

  •   Alternate greetings—Allows a user to add a special greeting for an extended absence

  •   Message tagging (private or urgent)


                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
•   Reply, forward, or save messages

  •   Pause, fast-forward, or rewind messages during playback

  •   Envelope information

  •   0-to-Operator with definable destination extension for Operator

  •   Message Waiting Indicator (MWI)

  •   Mailbox Full notification

  •   VPIM compatibility for message interchange with other Unity Express systems (or any other VPIM-compliant
      system)



Unity Express Auto Attendant
An Auto Attendant is essentially an interactive answering machine. It answers incoming calls, but it goes beyond that by
listening to the callers' responses to questions or options and offering more choices or playing specific greetings. If you
have ever heard "Press 1 for English; Appuyez sur le 2 pour Francais," you have heard an Auto Attendant. In addition,
Auto Attendant allows callers to search for the number of the person they are calling by first or last name, and Time-of-
Day and Day-of-Week call routing, so that different greetings are played when the business is closed. For many busi-
nesses, Auto Attendant can eliminate the need for a receptionist—or at least free the person up to do other tasks.

An Auto Attendant is a logical mapping of greetings, options, and responses. Creating one requires careful mapping of
the decision and response tree. The Cisco Unity Express Editor is a tool that aids and speeds this process. Using the tool,
administrators can create multiple customized Auto Attendant flows. Using familiar Windows GUI-based actions, admin-
istrators can drag-and-drop steps into the AA tree. Unity Express can run multiple AA scripts at the same time, providing
for very flexible and detailed responses to customer calls. If the Unity Express Editor GUI tool is not available and
changes need to be made, a TUI interface is also available. This can be very useful, for instance, if the administrator




                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
wakes up to a foot of new snow and has to call in to the system from home to record an emergency greeting that explains
that the business is closed that day because of the snowfall. Users also have access to a TUI that allows them to change
their personal mailbox greetings and set or record their alternate greetings.



Unity Express GUI
Much of the administration of UE can be managed from the administrative GUI. This includes normal operation such as
setting passwords and PINs for users, setting up mailboxes, creating users and groups, setting up backup and restore oper-
ations, and restarting the system. To use the GUI, open the Unity Express U R L at http://module_ip_address from a
supported browser. A command-line interface is also available for initializing the system and for times when the GUI is
not available. Certain tasks must be executed through the CLI. These include software installation, upgrade and licensing,
monitoring system resources (CPU, memory), and troubleshooting tasks such as viewing Syslog and trace files. Currently
only English language support is offered for both GUI and CLI, although other languages are supported for the TUI and
Auto Attendant. CUE provides the capability to bulk import users from Communications Manager Express at the
command line or by using the GUI.



Unity Express Software Files
Unity Express comes preloaded with software from the factory; however, if you must reload the software or perform
upgrades, both a TFTP and an FTP server are required. The TFTP server must hold the following files:

  •   cue-installer.nm-aim.3.1.1: This is the installer file for version 3.1.1. (Other versions will have appropriate file-
      names.)

  •   A license file: Various license files can be loaded, each allowing a specific number of mailboxes. The filenames
      include the number of licenses the file provides; for example, cue-vm-license_25mbx_cme_3.1.1.pkg provides 25
      licenses.




                      © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
The FTP server must hold the following files:

  • cue-vm.3.1.1.pkg: This is one of two system software files.

  • cue-vm-full-k9.nm-aim.3.1.1.prtl: This is the second system software file.

  • cue-vm-installer-k9.nm-aim.3.1.1.prtl: This is the application installation utility

  •   A language file: For example, cue-vm-en_US-lang-pack.nm-aim.3.1.1.prtl.



Router Configuration Prerequisites
Unity Express can be coresident in the CM Express router, or it can be installed in a different router. In either case, some
basic configurations must be applied to the host router:

  •   Routing: Regardless of which routing protocol is in use, the CUE router must be able to reach all networks that
      include hosts it must contact (voice-mail users, call agents, and so on).

  •   IP addressing: In addition to any interfaces that require IP addresses for network connectivity, the C U E module
      itself requires addressing to enable the "hidden" Ethernet link across the backplane. The recommendation is to set it
      up as follows:
      i n t e r f a c e Loopback 0
      i p address 1 9 2 . 1 6 8 . 6 6 . 1   255.255.255.0
      !   Defines a software i n t e r f a c e
      i


      interface       Service-Enginel/0
      !   T h i s is t h e CUE module p h y s i c a l i n t e r f a c e
      I
      ip unnumbered Loopback 0




                            © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
!   C o n f i g u r e s t h e module t o use t h e s o f t w a r e i n t e r f a c e I P
   i
  service-module            ip address        192.168.66.2 255.255.255.0
   !   D e f i n e s t h e IP of t h e CUE o p e r a t i n g system
   I
  service-module            ip default-gateway             192.168.66.1
  ip    route     192.168.66.2 255.255.255.255 service-engine                                1/0
   !   C o n f i g u r e s r o u t i n g f o r t h e CUE system t o reach t h e r o u t e r and t h e r e s t o f t h e
   !   network.


  The Service-Engine and the Service-Module must be on the same subnet; they are the two hosts in a dedicated,
  "hidden" Ethernet link that exists only on the backplane between the C U E hardware and the software running on it.
  The router sees the CUE module as a separate host, even though it is physically internal to the router.

• Create a SIP dial peer pointing at the C U E service-module. C M E uses SIP to communicate with the C U E system, so
  a SIP dial peer with the following specific configurations must be created, even if there are no other SIP connections
  in the CM system:
  d i a l - p e e r voice    7000 v o i p
   !   C r e a t e s t h e v o i p d i a l peer
  destination-pattern               77..
   !   Defines the d i g i t p a t t e r n of the mailboxes
  session       protocol       sipv2
   !   Sets SIP as t h e p r o t o c o l used to communicate w i t h t h e CUE d i a l peer
  session       target       ipv4:192.168.66.2
   !   I d e n t i f i e s t h e IP a d d r e s s of t h e CUE s e r v i c e - e n g i n e
  dtmf-relay         sip-notify
   !   Forces DTMF d i g i t s to be s e n t o u t - o f - b a n d as SIP NOTIFY messages i n s t e a d of i n - b a n d
  codec g711ulaw




                            © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
[ 104]




      !   S e t s t h e codec to G . 7 1 1 , w h i c h is t h e o n l y codec CUE s u p p o r t s
      no vad
      !   I t i s recommended t o d i s a b l e VAD f o r t h e CUE system d i a l p e e r .


  •   Configure ephone-dns for M W I on and off functionality. There are some unique characteristics of these specialized
      DNs: the digit patterns should be unique in the system, of course, but in addition a pattern of dots must follow the
      digits, and that number of dots must equal the number of digits used in the local dial plan. This means that if you use
      four digits for the local dial plan, there must be four dots; if a five-digit plan is used, there must be five, and so on.
      (All extensions in the local dial plan must use the same number of digits.) The resulting configuration will look
      something like this:
      ephone-dn 75
      number 4 4 7 5 . . . .
      mwi on
      ephone-dn 76
      number 4 4 7 6 . . . .
      mwi o f f


  •   Router H T T P access must be configured to support using the web-based GUI administration interface for both CUE
      and CME. (The GUI for C M E is not covered in this document.) The following commands will enable the HTTP
      server, define the path to the HTTP files, and configure authentication:

          •   Router(config)# ip http server: Enables the web server (it is disabled by default)

          •   Router(config)#ip http path flash: Sets the path to the http files as the root of the Flash directory

          •   Router(config)#ip http authentication {aaalenablellocalltacacs}: Sets the authentication type used when
              logging on to the web interface

It is possible—and typically recommended—to define a Unity Express web interface administrator that is separate from
the router administrator. Often the router admin and the C U E system admin are not the same person, and the C U E admin



                           © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
may not have the skills to administer the router. To prevent the CUE admin from inadvertently causing unwanted changes
to the router config, create a separate C U E web interface admin using the following command at the config-telephony-
service prompt:

web admin system name username {password string | s e c r e t         {0 | 5}    string}


The secret keyword encrypts the password in the router configuration. If you want to enter a plain-text password that
should be converted to an M D 5 hash, use the secret 0 string command; if the password is already M D 5 hashed, use the
secret 5 string command. After the initial C U E web admin account is created, the admin can create additional accounts
for the customer administrator and users using the GUI. (These accounts can also be created using the CLI.)



Setting Up Unity Express
After it is installed in the router, the CUE module starts automatically when the router is powered on. The module will
generally take longer than the router to fully boot up, and AIM modules in particular are slower to boot than NM
modules.

Command-line access to the C U E system is gained with the privileged exec command service-module service-engine
mod/0 session. For remote access, connect to the router CLI using SSH and enter this command. The exit command
returns you to the router CLI.

The following are some other useful C U E commands:

  • offline: Takes the CUE system offline. This command will warn you that all calls will be terminated if you confirm
    with a "y."

  • restore factory default: Self-explanatory; you are prompted with a message that all configuration info and data will
     be irrevocably deleted. If you confirm "y," you have a factory-defaulted C U E system.




                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Post-Installation Configuration Tool
A new (or factory-defaulted) CUE system will run the Post-Installation Configuration Tool the first time you log in.

IMPORTANT::
IMPORTANT:: Welcome to C i s c o Systems S e r v i c e Engine
IMPORTANT:: p o s t        installation configuration                      tool.
IMPORTANT::
IMPORTANT:: T h i s i s a one t i m e p r o c e s s w h i c h w i l l g u i d e
IMPORTANT:: you t h r o u g h i n i t i a l s e t u p o f y o u r S e r v i c e E n g i n e .
IMPORTANT:: Once r u n ,            t h i s p r o c e s s w i l l have c o n f i g u r e d
IMPORTANT:: t h e system f o r your l o c a t i o n .
IMPORTANT::
IMPORTANT:: I f you d o not w i s h t o c o n t i n u e ,                  t h e system w i l l b e h a l t e d
IMPORTANT:: s o i t can b e s a f e l y removed f r o m t h e r o u t e r .
IMPORTANT::
Do you w i s h to s t a r t       configuration          now     (y,n)?y
Are you s u r e      (y,n)?y


The system will now ask you a series of questions to provide the basic information needed to allow it to interact with the
network and let the administrator log in:

E n t e r Hostname
(my-hostname,          o r e n t e r t o use s e - 1 0 - 9 0 - 0 - 1 0 )
E n t e r Domain Name
(mydomain.com,          o r e n t e r t o use l o c a l d o m a i n ) :
Using l o c a l d o m a i n a s d e f a u l t
IMPORTANT:
IMPORTANT:




                               © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
IMPORTANT::       of IP a d d r e s s e s l i k e 1 . 1 0 0 . 1 0 . 2 0 5 f o r s e r v e r s used by CUE.   In o r d e r
IMPORTANT::       to c o n f i g u r e DNS you must know t h e IP address of at l e a s t one of your
IMPORTANT:: DNS S e r v e r s .
Would you l i k e to use DNS f o r CUE ( y , n ) ? n
WARNING:      If DNS is not used CUE w i l l r e q u i r e t h e use
WARNING:      of IP a d d r e s s e s .


E n t e r IP Address of t h e P r i m a r y NTP S e r v e r
(IP   address,or       enter to bypass):10.90.0.1
Found    server     10.90.0.1
E n t e r IP Address of t h e Secondary NTP S e r v e r
(IP address,        or enter to bypass):


The next questions set the location and time zone for the C U E system:

Please i d e n t i f y a l o c a t i o n s o t h a t t i m e zone r u l e s can b e s e t c o r r e c t l y .
Please s e l e c t a c o n t i n e n t o r o c e a n .




                              © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
8) B o l i v i a                         25) Guyana                              42) Suriname
9) B r a z i l                           26) H a i t i                           43) T r i n i d a d & Tobago
10) Canada                               27) Honduras                            44) T u r k s & Caicos Is
11) Cayman          Islands              28) Jamaica                             45) U n i t e d   States
12) C h i l e                            29) M a r t i n i q u e                 46) Uruguay
13) Colombia                             30) Mexico                              47) Venezuela
14) Costa R i c a                        31 ) M o n t s e r r a t                48) V i r g i n   Islands   (UK)
15) Cuba                                 32) N e t h e r l a n d s   Antilles    49) V i r g i n   Islands   (US)
16) Dominica                             33) N i c a r a g u a
17) Dominican           Republic         34) Panama
#? 45
Please s e l e c t one o f t h e f o l l o w i n g t i m e zone r e g i o n s .
 1) E a s t e r n Time
 2) E a s t e r n Time - M i c h i g a n       - most l o c a t i o n s
 3) E a s t e r n Time - Kentucky - L o u i s v i l l e a r e a
 4) E a s t e r n S t a n d a r d Time     - I n d i a n a - most l o c a t i o n s
 5) C e n t r a l Time
 6) C e n t r a l Time - M i c h i g a n       - Wisconsin border
 7) M o u n t a i n Time
 8) M o u n t a i n Time       - s o u t h Idaho & e a s t Oregon
 9) M o u n t a i n Time - Navajo
10) M o u n t a i n S t a n d a r d Time     - Arizona
11) P a c i f i c     Time
12) A l a s k a Time
13) A l a s k a Time - A l a s k a panhandle
14) A l a s k a Time         - A l a s k a panhandle neck
15) A l a s k a Time         - west A l a s k a
16) A l e u t i a n    Islands




                                 © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
17)    Hawaii
#? 11
The f o l l o w i n g i n f o r m a t i o n has been g i v e n :
United      States
Pacific      Time
Therefore TZ='America/Los_Angeles'                        w i l l b e used.
L o c a l t i m e is now: Mon Apr 28 1 1 : 0 1 : 2 0 MST 2008.
U n i v e r s a l Time is now: Mon Apr 28 1 7 : 0 1 : 2 0 UTC 2008.
Is t h e above i n f o r m a t i o n OK?
1) Yes
2) No
#? 1


C o n f i g u r i n g the system.          Please w a i t . . .


waiting      125     ...

The next questions and answers create the administrator account and password:

IMPORTANT::
IMPORTANT::         A d m i n i s t r a t o r Account C r e a t i o n
IMPORTANT::
IMPORTANT::         Create an a d m i n i s t r a t o r account. With t h i s account,
IMPORTANT::         you can l o g in to t h e C i s c o U n i t y Express GUI and
IMPORTANT::         run t h e i n i t i a l i z a t i o n w i z a r d .
IMPORTANT::
E n t e r a d m i n i s t r a t o r user    ID:
(user     ID):UnityAdmin
E n t e r password f o r        :
(password):Cisco




                                © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
C o n f i r m password f o r b y r e e n t e r i n g i t :
                      (password):Cisco
                      SYSTEM ONLINE
                      CUE>


                      At this point, you should be able to ping the IP address given to the C U E module from the PC you intend to use to
                      administer it. Open a supported web browser and go to http://cue_ip_address/. The first time you log in, a message
                      displays stating that only Administrator logins are allowed (until other users have been configured on the system). There
                      are several links to choose from; we are going to examine the Initialization Wizard.


                      CUE Initialization Wizard
                      The Initialization Wizard allows you to quickly set up a brand-new (or factory-defaulted) C U E system.

FIGURE 12
Cue Initialization
Wizard Login Screen




                                                   © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
At the opening screen (see Figure 12), the message in red clearly indicates that the system has not been configured and
                      that only Administrator logins are allowed. Log in with the credentials you supplied earlier.

FIGURE 13
Cue Initialization
Wizard Entry Screen




                                          © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
FIGURE 14                   C i s c o CallManager Express                                                                -11   • - • 11 -
                                          > Powered bv-Cfscc
Cue Initialization    <6»                                                                                                 CISCO



Wizard CM Login       Cisco Unity Express Initialization Wizard

Screen
                                                 C a l l M a n j g t r Express Login

                                                 Enter trie details of the CallManager Express that Cisco Unity Express will
                                                 connect to The user name and password will be used to authenticate while
                                                 retrieving information from the CallManagei Express


                                                 Hostname': '101 10.2

                                                 User Name *: jCisco




                                                 * indicates a mandatory field

                                                                                       :                :
                                                                                           - | Next |       j   Cancel | Help |




                      The CM Express Login page lets you provide the address and credentials the CUE unit will use to contact the C M E
                      router. This is the IP address of the service engine.

FIGURE 15
Cue Initialization
Wizard Import Users
Screen




                                                                © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
CUE will automatically import the users defined under the ephones in CME. You can then select whether users should
                     have a mailbox, whether they are a voice-mail Administrator, and whether to set CFNA and CFB.

FIGURE 16
Cue Initialization
Wizard System
Defaults Screen




                     The next screen configures the system defaults for language, user passwords and PINs, mailbox and message max size,
                     and message retention window.




                                        © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
FIGURE 17
Cue Initialization
Wizard Call Handling
Screen




                       The Call Handling screen defines the DNs assigned for accessing voice mail, AA and the voice-mail operator, as well as
                       defining M W I operation.




                                           © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
FIGURE 18
Cue Initialization
Wizard Commit
Screen




                     Next, you are shown a review screen of the values you have entered so far, and you're given the option to commit the
                     changes or go back to modify them.

                     The final screen lists the committed information.




                                         © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
FIGURE 19
Cue Initialization
Wizard Committed
Information Screen




                     Auto Attendant
                     The Auto Attendant (AA) is like the receptionist; a series of recorded messages and interactive prompts allows you to
                     create an answering system that gets callers either to an individual or to a voice mailbox so they can leave a message.
                     One advantage of having an AA is that it is then possible to free up the receptionist to do other useful tasks. An AA can
                     deal with multiple calls at the same time.




                                         © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
FIGURE 20
Auto Attendant List
Screen




                      From the Voice Mail menu, select Auto Attendant. This shows a list of configured AAs. Clicking the name will lead you
                      to the configuration screens.

FIGURE 21
AA Language
Settings




                      The first configuration is the language and script this AA will use.




                                           © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
118]




FIGURE 22
AA Scripts




                   The next screen allows you to choose the individual recordings that the script calls. It is also possible to record custom
                   AA script recordings.

FIGURE 23
AA Call Handling




                   The Call Handling screen lets you specify the extension the system will dial to reach this AA and how many concurrent
                   sessions the AA will support.

                                        © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
I n t r o d u c i n g t h e C i s c o S m a r t Business
Communications System
The Cisco SBCS is a unified communications appliance aimed squarely at the small-business market. These all-in-one
devices support data, voice, video, AA, voice mail, security, and wireless for up to 50 users. They leverage UC500 Series
devices, including PoE switches, to provide the expansion capability to scale to the maximum endpoint capacity. Many
connectivity modules for WAN, Internet, and PSTN options are available, and a simple-to-use graphical interface configu-
ration tool makes it cost effective for small businesses to take advantage of Cisco's Unified Communications products.



Hardware Components
The core of the SBCS is the UC 500 Series for Small Business. This multiservice appliance incorporates routing, firewall,
VPN, IPS, PoE switchports, WAN and PSTN connectivity options, and wireless options. The SBCS incorporates C M E
4.2 and C U E 3.1.1, with the features found on larger ISR hardware. The Catalyst 520 switch allows for expansion of the
system to support more endpoints than the UC500 core unit supports.

For more complex wireless deployments, the Cisco Mobility Express Solution with the Cisco 521 Wireless Express
Access Point and the Cisco 526 Wireless Express Mobility Controller provide scalable, manageable, and secure wireless
connectivity for both data and voice endpoints.

The SBCS supports a wide range of Cisco IP phones, including video and wireless capabilities. Specialized applications,
both from Cisco and third-party vendors, can integrate with the SBCS to further leverage the productivity gains offered
by unified communications.

The SBCS comes in two form factors: A desktop or wall-mount unit for installations of up to 16 users and a rack-mount
unit for 32-48-user deployments; the smaller units support ISDN BRI PSTN, F X O , and FXS connections, and the larger
units add support for Tl and El interfaces, both PRI and CAS.




                    © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Telephony Features
The SBCS supports most of the features desired in a business phone system, including the following:

  •   PBX mode or keyswitch mode

  •   System features

        •   Language

        •   Date format

        •   System message

        •   System speed dials

  •   Network features

        •   Voice V L A N

        •   D H C P scope settings

        •   IP addressing

  •   SIP Trunk settings

  •   Dial Plan settings

        •   Extension length

        •   Outgoing call handling

        •   Incoming call handling

  •   Voice-mail features

        •   Voice-mail pilot numbers

        •   Auto Attendant



                       © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
•   Voice features

       •   MOH

       •   Paging

       •   Intercom

       •   Hunt Group

       •   Call Pickup

       •   Caller ID Blocking

       •   Call blocking

       •   Call Park

       •   Conferencing

  •   Users

       •   Name

       •   Association with a device

  •   Phone

       •   M A C address

       •   Extension number(s)

       •   Permissions

       •   Call Forward

Additional features are documented online.




                       © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Security Features
The SBCS supports the Cisco IOS firewall, Easy VPN Server and Remote, NAT, and 802. lx authentication.



Wireless Features
The smaller SBCS can be ordered with an integrated wireless AP, or external 521 Series wireless APs can be connected.
The larger SBCS models do not support internal APs. The standalone administrative capability of the Cisco Configuration
Assistant will support up to three connected APs. For support of up to 12 APs, the use of a Cisco 526 Wireless Express
Mobility Controller for every 6 APs is required. The SBCS systems provide full support for wireless security, including
WPA and WPA2, LEAP, PEAP, WEP, as well as voice VLANs with QoS.



Cisco Configuration Assistant
The C C A is a powerful and simple GUI tool for administering the UC500 Series platforms. This tool is used to deploy,
configure, and maintain the SBCS devices, allowing control of the following:

  •   Switching

  •   Telephony

  •   Wireless

  •   Security

  • Network services

  •   Internet connectivity

The GUI tool provides a network map view, showing the devices discovered in the system, as well as a front-panel view
of the SBCS system, showing ports and their status. The C C A even allows drag-and-drop upgrades to IOS software,
phone firmware, and language files.


                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
CCNA Voice Quick Reference               by Michael Valentine

   Introducing the Cisco Smart Business Communications System

FIGURE 24                                                    UC520
Cisco Configuration
Assistant Topology
View




                        SEP000D29C0198C    SEP0012D9FF3979         SEP001794627A1A         SEP0017E06A3FCC



FIGURE 25
Cisco Configuration                                                     Cisco Unified 5 0 0 Series
Assistant Front Panel
View




                        For those who miss the CLI, it is still possible to do all administrative tasks from the command line if you so desire.



                        Implementing Smart Business Communications System Voice Features
                        The SBCS is remarkably simple to use; in fact, it ships with a default configuration that automatically assigns extensions
                        to phones as they are plugged in, enables the device to place and receive calls on the PSTN interface, and sets up default



                                             © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
configurations for the firewall, wireless (if applicable), NAT, VLANs, and telephony features. This is as close to a plug-
                 and-play phone system as it gets.

                 Install the Cisco Configuration Assistant on your administrative PC. (The installer is available as a free download from
                 Cisco.com.) When you run the software, it will ask for the IP address of the system to connect to; the default configura-
                 tion gives the SBCS the IP of 192.168.10.1.

                 C C A will autodiscover any U C 5 0 0 Series devices that are connected and generate a topology map. It is recommended,
                 however, that you use the Device Setup Wizard to perform the initial setup, because it integrates a number of setup proce-
                 dures that are otherwise widely dispersed throughout the application. The following steps detail how to use the Device
                 Setup Wizard:

FIGURE 26
The CCA Device
Setup Wizard—
Step 1




                  1. Select a Device: With the C C A open, choose Setup, Device Setup Wizard. From the drop-down menu, choose the
                     device you want to configure. (Only devices in the UC500 Series will be available.) Click Next.

                  2. Prepare the Device: Verify that no other devices are connected; power them down or disconnect them if they are.
                     Click Next.


                                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
3. Power Up Device: You are prompted to power up the device; if it is already powered up, click Next.

 4. Connect Device to Your PC/Laptop: You must connect to one of the PoE ports with a straight-through Ethernet
    cable. Wait until your PC has obtained an IP address; then click Next. The C C A will verify connectivity to the
    device.

 5. Verifying Connectivity: The CCA will contact the device and confirm connectivity to it. This may take a minute or
    two.

 6. Hostname and User Authentication: Enter the administrator username and password. Click Next.

 7. Enter Date and Time Information: You have the choice of synchronizing the time to the PC's clock or setting it
    manually. If you want to use N T P for the device's time synchronization, you can skip this step and configure NTP
    later.

 8. Enter IP Address and Other Device Setup Parameters: In this screen, you select the WAN interface and can then
    choose to disable D H C P and set a static IP address.

 9. Enter Other Device Setup Parameters: In this section, you select the Region, Phone Language, and Voicemail
    language as appropriate to the device's location. These settings change the ring cadence on the phones as well as the
    languages displayed and/or heard on the system.

1 0 . Summary: A brief summary of the configuration you have entered is displayed along with a brief caution that the
      update may take up to 10 minutes.




                   © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
FIGURE 27
The CCA Connect
Window




                  When you launch the CCA application, the Connect window appears. Here you can enter a specific community, IP
                  address, or hostname of a device to connect to, modify options for connection port numbers, or create a new community
                  of devices.

                  A community is a group of SBCS devices (including 500 Series routers, 520 Series switches, wireless APs, and wireless
                  access controllers). The devices might not be in the same physical location or logical subnet. Communities make central-
                  ized management of a related set of devices simpler; for example, if you have several customers, each of whom has an
                  SBCS system, you could create a community for each customer, making your administrative organization simpler.


                  C C A Menus
                  After connection to the device or community, you have access to the menus in the left pane.

FIGURE 28         n    $Q Selm
The Setup Menu        Device Setup Wizard..




                  The first menu is the Setup menu, under which is located the Device Setup Wizard detailed earlier.




                                              © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
FIGURE 29
The Configure Menu




                     Next is the Configure menu, which has options to configure Ports, Security, Telephony, Routing, Device Properties, and
                     Internet Connection. You can also save the system configuration from this menu.

                     Under Device Properties, the submenus include the following:

                       •   IP Address: Allows you to view and change the IP addresses on a device and set DNS server IPs.

                       •   Hostname: Allows you to change the hostname of a device.

                       •   System Time: Allows you to view, set, and sync the time as well as configure N T P settings on one or more devices.

                       • H T T P Port: Allows you to change the HTTP default port the device uses.

                       • Users and Passwords: Here you can change the administrator password on a device or on all devices simultaneously.

                       • Device Access: Here you can set the allowed terminal protocols (Telnet, SSH, or both) that can be used to access a
                         device.
                                          © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
S N M P : Here you configure S N M P settings, including location and contact, traps to send, community strings, and
                        so on.

FIGURE 3 0
The Monitor Menu




                   The Monitor menu allows you to generate reports and change the view from Front Panel to Topology. The Health link
                   generates graphical charts showing the statistics for key performance counters. The Event Notification and System Event
                   Messages links allow you to view and acknowledge messages and resolve problems automatically using Cisco
                   Configuration Assistant (if possible).

FIGURE 31
The Maintenance
Menu




                   The Maintenance menu gives you the ability to perform software upgrades (with drag-and-drop functionality), manage
                   the files stored on device Flash memory, manage your configuration archive, and restart or reset devices. The license
                   management option visible here may not be supported by the UC500 IOS in use, depending on the model.




                                       © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Topology View




Under the Monitor menu, selecting Views, Topology generates a network map of the SBCS devices discovered or named
in the community. This view allows you to annotate devices with IP addresses, port IDs, a friendly name, or a M A C
address. Right-clicking or double-clicking a device allows you to view its properties or change the settings of devices; the
options vary depending on the device selected.


Front Panel View




                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Next under Views is the Front Panel View; this shows a graphical, interactive representation of the device. Interfaces are
                       configurable by right-clicking them; you can choose to configure all ports in a module or a single one. For example, you
                       can enable or disable the port and configure the duplex, speed, and PoE settings of an Ethernet port.


                       Configure Menu: Telephony
                       The Telephony menu includes the Voice configuration screen, which in turn includes several tabs. If there is an error or
                       missing information on any page, the tab will be highlighted in red. The following explains what is found and config-
                       urable in each tab:

FIGURE 34
The Voice Device Tab




                        • Device: The Device tab allows you to modify the hardware configuration; however, this is seldom necessary because
                          it is autodiscovered by CCA. Here we can change the call agent from a PBX to a Key system depending on the
                          needs of the customer. (This decision is part of the planning process and will be largely made by the customer, with
                          advice from the designer.) This screen also lists the number of licenses (IP Phones) the unit supports.

                                           © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
FIGURE 35
The Voice System
Tab




                   System: The System tab lets you configure region, voice-mail, and phone language settings, clock format, and
                   system speed dials.




                                  © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
FIGURE   36
The Voice Network
Tab




                    •   N e t w o r k : This is where you configure the Voice V L A N and D H C P scope.




                                         © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
FIGURE 37
The Voice AA &
Voicemail Tab




                 • AA & Voicemail: Here you set the extension numbers for the Auto Attendant and Voicemail, as well as their PSTN
                   access numbers.




                                  © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
FIGURE 38
The Voice SIP Trunk
Tab




                      • SIP Trunk: SIP trunks are used to connect to other telephony devices or service providers. The SBCS provides
                        built-in support for AT&T and CBeyond Communications SIP trunking services, as well as generic SIP trunks for
                        other providers. On this page you identify the SIP Proxy and Registrar servers and the M W I server, define the digest
                        authentication username and password, and define domain information.

FIGURE 39
The Voice Features
Tab




                                        © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Voice F e a t u r e s : In this screen, you identify the M O H audio file, enable and configure Paging, Group Pickup,
                       Intercom, Hunt Groups, Call Park, and Conferencing. Additionally, you can configure the CallerlD Block code and
                       the Outgoing Call Block List.

FIGURE 40
The Dial Plan Tab




                    • Dial P l a n : In the Dial Plan screen, you can adjust the number of digits per extension (the default is 3) and set the
                      numbering plan locale to North American or Other. Choosing North American preconfigures the area codes as three-
                      digit, the long-distance access code as 1, and the international code as O i l — t h e s e are all standardized as part of the
                      North American Numbering Plan. Choosing Other allows you to customize the dial plan as needed for other number-
                      ing plans worldwide. This page also allows you to configure the behavior for incoming calls; either send them to an
                      operator or have calls on a particular FXO port sent to a specific extension.




                                       © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
FIGURE 41
The Users Tab




                • U s e r s : Here you associate users with the phones discovered by CCA and add new phones as needed. You also have
                  access to the phone configuration screen by clicking the More button.




                                  © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
The More Screen




                  In this screen, you can change what the phone buttons do, configure user permission, define paging group, configure
                  intercom, and set timers and operations for busy and no-answer rules.



                  Implementing Additional Smart Business Communications System
                  Features
                  The SBCS includes support for many features beyond the telephone system; it is also a router, a firewall, an Ethernet
                  switch, a D H C P server, and optionally a wireless AP. This section will review the configuration of these elements.


                  Port Settings
                  From the Configure menu, select Ports, Port Settings.



                                      © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
FIGURE 43
Port Settings
Configuration




                The Configuration Settings tab (shown in Figure 43) allows you to enable and disable ports, set duplex and speed, and
                enable or disable PoE negotiation.




                                    © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
The Runtime Status tab shows what the port is actually doing. (In contrast to the setting of Auto in the Configuration tab,
here you see that ports have actually negotiated Full Duplex/100 Mbps and PoE.) At the top of the table you can see the
allocated PoE, expressed as Consumed and Remaining values. The display shows Unknown, Cisco, and IEEE under the
Device column; these relate to the different PoE delivery types (IEEE being the current standard, and Cisco being the
prestandard proprietary implementation. Unknown typically means the attached device does not need PoE).


Security

Under the Security menu, you will find submenus for NAT, VPN Server, Security Audit, and Firewall and D M Z .

NAT
Network Address Translation serves three purposes: First, it hides internal addresses from the outside network (typically
the Internet). Second, it can allow many internal addresses to access the Internet using a single, registered Internet IP.
                    © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
These first two capabilities are enabled by default on the SBCS. Third, it can provide selective access to internal IPO
               addresses from the outside in a controlled manner; this is useful for reaching mail and FTP servers from the Internet, for
               example.

FIGURE 45
The NAT Page




               The NAT page allows you to configure these specific server targets, as well as firewall service configuration.

               VPN     Server
               The V P N Server page lists and allows you to create the user accounts that can access the system via VPN (to a maximum
               of 10 concurrent sessions). You must define a preshared key, which is used in the authentication and encryption process.
               Next, define the IP address range that will be assigned to remote clients connecting to the system. The option of enabling
               Split Tunneling allows clients to use their own Internet connection for any network other than the ones listed; this is
               commonly used if security is less of a concern.

               Security    Audit
               The Security Audit link allows you to inspect and report on the security configuration of a particular device. You are
               presented with a list of security checks and an indication of whether the device has passed the check; from here, you can



                                   © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
select one or more checks and click OK to have the C C A fix the security problem automatically. Although it is conven-
ient and simple, be aware that increasing the security settings of a device may block connectivity to some applications. If
this is the case, the change can also be undone in this interface, until the best course of action to both resolve the security
issue and allow the intended operation can be determined.

Firewall and DMZ
The Firewall and D M Z page allows you to configure the basic security level (High, Medium, or Low) of the firewall to
apply a preconfigured set of typical restrictions, define which interfaces are trusted and untrusted, and also to define
which interface is the D M Z (Demilitarized Zone—a term that describes a screened network where certain servers and
resources are placed so that controlled access to them can be provided without risking the private network).


Routing
Although the SBCS does not typically run dynamic routing protocols (being designed for smaller installations where such
power is not required or will be handled by other devices), you do have the ability to configure static routes to ensure the
device can reach remote subnets not directly connected.


DHCP
Configuring a D H C P server allows the SNCS to allocate IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway values to hosts on
the LAN. The interface allows you to create a scope of addresses for each VLAN. (A typical system will have one VLAN
for the phones and at least one more for the data devices, such as PCs.) You can also configure static D H C P bindings (so
that you can predict what IP a given MAC address will be assigned) and which addresses or range of addresses will be
excluded from the D H C P scope. The SBCS D H C P server is suited to the task of a small network deployment and should
not be used for larger environments.




                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Smartports

FIGURE 46
Smartports




             The Smartports feature allows for rapid configuration of common interface settings appropriate to different device types;
             for example, selecting Switch or Router from the pull-down list associated with a port will activate the 802.1Q trunking
             protocol; selecting IP Phone + Desktop will configure multiple-VLAN functionality and QoS settings. The interface also
             allows you to view and set the Access (data) and Voice VLANs per port. You can also view the port configuration for the
             entire device by clicking its image and then clicking Details.


             Wireless
             If the SBCS is equipped with or connected to a wireless device, by selecting Configure, W L A N s you can view and
             change settings for the SSIDs for data and voice (for use with wireless IP Phones such as the 7920 and 7921). Selecting
             an SSID allows you to view and configure the wireless settings for the SSID, including the following:

               •   B r o a d c a s t in B e a c o n : Select whether to make the SSID visible to wireless devices.

               •   V L A N : Change the V L A N to which the SSID belongs.


                                    © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
• Security Settings: Change from the default of no security to a setting that may include authentication, encryption,
     or both, using WEP, LEAP, WPA, or WPA2, among others.


Internet Connection
This screen allows you to view and change the settings for the WAN interface. You can enable or disable the interface,
specify the use of PPPoE if your Internet provider requires it, and choose the addressing method. D H C P can be used, or
if your service provider has allocated you a static IP, you can specify the IP, mask, and default gateway. If you have
selected PPPoE, you can choose IP Negotiated, which relies on the negotiation capabilities of PPPoE to determine an IP
address.


Save Configuration
This simple screen allows you to save the configuration of one or all devices to N V R A M , making it the startup configura-
tion at the next reboot of the device.



Maintaining a Smart Business Communications System
Several tools are included in C C A to monitor and maintain the SBCS. The Monitor menu includes Reports, with links for
Inventory and VPN Status; Views, with links to Front Panel and Topology (discussed previously), Health; Event
Notification; and System Messages.




                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Health

FIGURE 47
The Health Display




                     Under the Monitor menu, select Health. This generates a graphical representation (shown in Figure 47) of the critical
                     general health statistics of the SBCS: Bandwidth Utilization, Packet Error Rate, PoE Utilization, Temperature, CPU
                     Utilization, and Memory Utilization. These stats are updated every minute. More information can be read in the Health
                     Details window, accessed by clicking the Details button.




                                         © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Event Notification
                CCA allows you to view Event logs for all devices in your network, with easy-to-read severity icons to quickly indicate
                whether the event is serious or informational:

                  •   Critical errors are marked as Level 0 and 1.

                  •   Errors are marked as Level 2 or 3.

                  •   Warnings are marked as Level 4.

                  •   Informational events are marked as Level 5, 6, or 7.

                The Filter button allows you to view only messages of the selected level(s). The icons for these messages are shown next:

FIGURE 48
Event Monitor




                The Event Notification window allows you to acknowledge event notifications, tell CCA to take action where possible,
                and turn off the Alert LED on SBCS switches.


                System Messages
                This screen allows you to view system messages from all devices or any single device and apply filters for severity level,
                if desired. These messages are the same that can be seen at the terminal monitor of the IOS CLI.




                                     © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
Backup and Restore
From the Maintenance menu, choose Configuration Archive. The window displays the Backup tab and the Restore tab. To
back up, select All Devices or just a single device. Add a descriptive note for future reference, make note of the backup
path, and click Back Up. The files are written to the C:  o u e t and Settings<user n m > .configuration
                                                         D c m ns                               a e
assistants b c u s directory by default; by selecting the Preferences button, you can change the directory and choose
               akp
to save the configuration to the device before backing it up.

The Restore tab allows you to select your view of backed-up configurations:

  •   Show backed-up configurations of the selected device

  •   Show backed-up configurations of the selected device type

  •   Show all backed-up configurations


Choose a device to restore, select a backup file, note any descriptive comments, and click Restore.


Restart/Reset
Under the Maintenance menu, the next link is Restart/Reset. This allows you to reboot the chosen device and gives you
the option of resetting it to factory defaults if need be.




                    © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
[ 147]

                                                                                                                cannot attest to the accuracy of this information. Use of a term in this digital Short Cut should not be regarded as
CCNA Voice Quick Reference                                                                                      affecting the validity of any trademark or service mark.

Michael Valentine
                                                                                                                Feedback Information
Copyright © 2008 Cisco Systems, Inc.
                                                                                                                At Cisco Press, our goal is to create in-depth technical books of the highest quality and value. Each book is crafted
Published by:                                                                                                   with care and precision, undergoing rigorous development that involves the unique expertise of members of the
Cisco Press                                                                                                     professional technical community.
800 East 96th Street
                                                                                                                Reader feedback is a natural continuation of this process. If you have any comments on how we could improve the
Indianapolis, Indiana 46240 USA
                                                                                                                quality of this digital Short Cut or otherwise alter it to better suit your needs, you can contact us through email at
All rights reserved. No part of this digital Short Cut may be reproduced or transmit-
                                                                                                                feedback@ciscopress.com. Please be sure to include the digital Short Cut title and ISBN in your message.
ted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying,
                                                                                                                We greatly appreciate your assistance.
recording, or by any information storage and retrieval system, without written
permission from the publisher, except for the inclusion of brief quotations in a
review.                                                                                                         Corporate and Government Sales
First Release June 2008                                                                                         The publisher offers excellent discounts on this digital Short Cut when ordered in quantity for bulk purchases or
                                                                                                                special sales, which may include electronic versions and/or custom covers and content particular to your business,
ISBN-13: 978-1-58705-767-0
                                                                                                                training goals, marketing focus, and branding interests. For more information, please contact: U.S. Corporate and
ISBN-10: 1-58705-767-0                                                                                          Government Sales 1-800-382-3419 corpsales@pearsontechgroup.com.
                                                                                                                For sales outside the United States please contact: International Sales international@pearsoned.com
Warning and Disclaimer
This digital Short Cut is designed to provide information about networking. Every
                                                                                                                                                      Americas Headquarters                                   Asia Pacific Headquarters                                 Europe Headquarters
effort has been made to make this digital Short Cut as complete and accurate as                                                                       Cisco Systems, Inc.                                     Cisco Systems. Inc.                                       Cisco Systems International BV
                                                                                                                                                      170 West Tasman Drive                                   168 Robinson Road                                         Haarler berg park
possible, but no warranty or fitness is implied.                                                                                                      San Jose. CA 95134-1706                                 #28-01 Capital Tower                                      Haarlerbergweg 13-19
                                                                                                                                                      USA                                                     Singapore068912                                           1101 CHAmsterdam
The information is provided on an "as is" basis. The authors, Cisco Press, and Cisco                                                                  www.cisco.com                                           wwwcisco.com                                              The Netherlands
                                                                                                                                                      Tel: 408 526-4000                                       Tel: +65 6317 7777                                        www-europe.cisco.com
Systems, Inc. shall have neither liability nor responsibility to any person or entity                                                                 800 553-NETS (6387)                                     Fax:+65 6317 7799                                         Tel:+31 0 800 020 0791
                                                                                                                                                      Fax:408 527-0883                                                                                                  Fax:+31 0 2 0 3 5 7 1100
with respect to any loss or damages arising from the information contained in this
                                                                                             Cisco has more than 200 offices worldwide. Addresses, phone numbers, and fax numbers are listed on the Cisco website at www.cisco.com/go/offices,
digital Short Cut.
                                                                                          ©2007 Cisco Systems. Inc. All rights reserved. CCVR the Cisco logo, and the Cisco Square Bridge logo are trademarks of Cisco Systems. Inc: Changing the Way We Work. Live, Play, and Learn is a service mark of Cisco
The opinions expressed in this digital Short Cut belong to the authors and are not        Systems, Inc.; and Access Registrar. Aironet, BPX. Catalyst. CCDA, CCDR CCIE, CCIP. CCNA, CCNR CCSP Cisco, the Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert logo, Cisco IOS, Cisco Press, Cisco Systems. Cisco Systems Capital,
                                                                                          the Cisco Systems logo, Cisco Unity, Enterprise/Solver, Ether Channel, EtherFast, EtherSwitch. Fast Step. Follow Me Browsing, FormShare. GigaDrive, GigaStack. HomeLink, Internet Quotient, IOS, iPhone, IP/TV. iQ Expertise, the
necessarily those of Cisco Systems, Inc.                                                  iQ logo. iQ Net Readiness Scorecard. iQuick Study. LightStream. Linksys. Meeting Place. MGX. Networking Academy. Network Registrar Packet. PIX. ProConnect. RateMUX. ScriptShare SlideCast. SMARTnet, StackWise. The
                                                                                          Fastest Way to Increase Your Internet Quotient, and TransPath are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc and/or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries.


Trademark Acknowledgments                                                                 All other trademarks mentioned in this document or Website are the property of their respective owners The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company (0701R]


All terms mentioned in this digital Short Cut that are known to be trademarks or
service marks have been appropriately capitalized. Cisco Press or Cisco Systems, Inc.




                                                                       © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
>            Safari Library
                                         Subscribe Now!
                                          http://safari.ciscopress.com/library




Safari's entire technology collection is now available with no restrictions.
Imagine the value of being able to search and access thousands of books,
videos, and articles from leading technology authors whenever you wish.


EXPLORE TOPICS MORE FULLY
Gain a m o r e robust u n d e r s t a n d i n g of r e l a t e d issues by using Safari as your r e s e a r c h t o o l .
With Safari L i b r a r y you can leverage the k n o w l e d g e of the w o r l d ' s t e c h n o l o g y g u r u s . For
one flat, m o n t h l y fee, y o u ' l l have u n r e s t r i c t e d access to a r e f e r e n c e collection offered
n o w h e r e else in the w o r l d — a l l at y o u r f i n g e r t i p s .

With a Safari Library s u b s c r i p t i o n , y o u ' l l get the f o l l o w i n g p r e m i u m services:

      • ^ I m m e d i a t e access to the newest, c u t t i n g - e d g e b o o k s — A p p r o x i m a t e l y eighty
            new titles are added per m o n t h in conjunction w i t h , or in advance of, t h e i r
            print publication.

     ' • ^ C h a p t e r d o w n l o a d s — D o w n l o a d five c h a p t e r s per m o n t h so you can w o r k
           offline w h e n you need to.

           Rough Cuts—A service that provides online access to p r e p u b l i c a t i o n i n f o r m a t i o n
           on advanced t e c h n o l o g i e s . Content is updated as the a u t h o r w r i t e s the book.
           You canalso download Rough Cuts for offline r e f e r e n c e
           V i d e o s — P r e m i e r design and d e v e l o p m e n t videos f r o m t r a i n i n g and e - l e a r n i n g
           expert lynda.com and o t h e r p u b l i s h e r s you t r u s t .

     ' • ^ C u t and paste code—Cut and paste code directly f r o m Safari. Save time.
           Eliminate errors.

     • • ^ S a v e up to 35% on print books—Safari S u b s c r i b e r s receive a discount of
           up to 35% on p u b l i s h e r s ' print books.
Ccna.Voice.Quick.Refence.Sheet

More Related Content

PPT
Introducing Cisco Voice and Unified Communications
PPT
Why Unified Communications
PPT
Why cisco unified_communications
PDF
Introduction to Unified Communications: Concepts and Opportunities
PPTX
What is Unified Communication & Its Importance?
PPTX
Unifying Communications through Interoperability - Mark Coleman, Microsoft.
PPSX
Unified Communication Presentation
PDF
Unified Communications & Collaboration: Connecting people and information
Introducing Cisco Voice and Unified Communications
Why Unified Communications
Why cisco unified_communications
Introduction to Unified Communications: Concepts and Opportunities
What is Unified Communication & Its Importance?
Unifying Communications through Interoperability - Mark Coleman, Microsoft.
Unified Communication Presentation
Unified Communications & Collaboration: Connecting people and information

What's hot (19)

PPTX
Unified Communications - Ten reasons organisations are switching
PDF
UC Market Overview - Cisco, Avaya, Microsoft, Shoretel
PDF
Unified Communication Systems - Tech Scouting - SPJCM
PDF
Understanding and Applying Unified Communications
PDF
EC Unified Communications Presentation
PPTX
Cisco vs. Microsoft - Strategic Decisions for a Unified Communications Deploy...
PPT
Datanamics/Cisco UC Overview
PDF
[CompTIA] 4th Annual Trends in Cloud Computing - Full Report
PPT
Pass4sure 640-461 Study Guide
PDF
Market Research Report : Unified Communications Market in India 2012
PPT
Microsoft Unified Communications - Overview Presentation
PPT
COLT Unified Communications
PDF
Communications... Unified or Not?
PPTX
Comcast Business VoiceEdge Presentation 2014_call 1 786 558 4440
PDF
CIO | 3 STEPS to Maximizing ROI for Microsoft Lync Enterprise Voice
PDF
CAME Group Spa
PDF
REPORT-Broadview-AND-Frost-and-Sullivan-Staying-Ahead-of-the-Curve-through-Ho...
PDF
NEC UNIVERGE BLUE CONNECT - Brochure
Unified Communications - Ten reasons organisations are switching
UC Market Overview - Cisco, Avaya, Microsoft, Shoretel
Unified Communication Systems - Tech Scouting - SPJCM
Understanding and Applying Unified Communications
EC Unified Communications Presentation
Cisco vs. Microsoft - Strategic Decisions for a Unified Communications Deploy...
Datanamics/Cisco UC Overview
[CompTIA] 4th Annual Trends in Cloud Computing - Full Report
Pass4sure 640-461 Study Guide
Market Research Report : Unified Communications Market in India 2012
Microsoft Unified Communications - Overview Presentation
COLT Unified Communications
Communications... Unified or Not?
Comcast Business VoiceEdge Presentation 2014_call 1 786 558 4440
CIO | 3 STEPS to Maximizing ROI for Microsoft Lync Enterprise Voice
CAME Group Spa
REPORT-Broadview-AND-Frost-and-Sullivan-Staying-Ahead-of-the-Curve-through-Ho...
NEC UNIVERGE BLUE CONNECT - Brochure
Ad

Similar to Ccna.Voice.Quick.Refence.Sheet (20)

PDF
SDf_dutrefnd_cxc_sgjhkcnv,vnvdd:f,OVR.pdf
PDF
cisco_unified78963254121communications.pdf
PPT
Datanamics/Cisco UC overview
PDF
Cisco VoIp
PDF
UC: The Light at the End of the Tunnel
PDF
640 460
PDF
Small Business Guide to Unified Communications
PPTX
PACE-IT: Basic Elements of Unified Communications - N10 006
PPT
CCNA
PDF
Understanding Unified Communications - White Paper
PPT
Cisco Ccna Certification
PDF
Top Institute for Cisco Certification Training - Aptech Chowringhee
PDF
Ccvp plus module 1
PDF
Implementing Voice Over Ip 1st Bhumip Khasnabish
PDF
COLT Telecom - VoIP For Enterprise Customers, a COLT Business Briefing
PPT
Cuae Business Values V 1.8.2
PPTX
Aptech Chowringhee - Renowned Networking Institute in Kolkata
PDF
Afrina Naznin (063514056)
SDf_dutrefnd_cxc_sgjhkcnv,vnvdd:f,OVR.pdf
cisco_unified78963254121communications.pdf
Datanamics/Cisco UC overview
Cisco VoIp
UC: The Light at the End of the Tunnel
640 460
Small Business Guide to Unified Communications
PACE-IT: Basic Elements of Unified Communications - N10 006
CCNA
Understanding Unified Communications - White Paper
Cisco Ccna Certification
Top Institute for Cisco Certification Training - Aptech Chowringhee
Ccvp plus module 1
Implementing Voice Over Ip 1st Bhumip Khasnabish
COLT Telecom - VoIP For Enterprise Customers, a COLT Business Briefing
Cuae Business Values V 1.8.2
Aptech Chowringhee - Renowned Networking Institute in Kolkata
Afrina Naznin (063514056)
Ad

More from ashiesh0007 (10)

PPTX
PPTX
H323 Digital Failures
PPT
TSRT Crashes
PPT
Wireshark
PPTX
Subnetting
DOC
Boot Process Of Ip Phone
PDF
Solution Reference Network Design Guide 7.X
PPTX
Computer Network
PPT
Basics Of Networking (Overview)
DOCX
Electrical Engineering Interview Questions
H323 Digital Failures
TSRT Crashes
Wireshark
Subnetting
Boot Process Of Ip Phone
Solution Reference Network Design Guide 7.X
Computer Network
Basics Of Networking (Overview)
Electrical Engineering Interview Questions

Ccna.Voice.Quick.Refence.Sheet

  • 1. CCNA Voice Quick Reference Michael Valentine ciscopress.com Your S h o r t Cut t o K n o w l e d g e
  • 2. As a final exam preparation tool, the CCNA Voice Quick Reference provides a concise review of all objectives on the new IIUC exam (640-460). This digital Short Cut provides you with detailed, graphical-based information, highlighting only the key topics in cram-style format. With this document as your guide, you will review topics on concepts and commands that apply to Cisco Unified Communications for small and medium-sized businesses. This fact-filled Quick Reference allows you to get all-important information at a glance, helping you focus your study on areas of weakness and enhancing your memory retention of essential exam concepts. About the Author Mike Valentine has 13 years of experience in the IT field, specializing in network design and installation. He is currently a Cisco trainer with Skyline Advanced Technology Services and specializes in Cisco Unified Communications, CCNA, and CCNP classes. His accessible, humorous, and effective teaching style has demystified Cisco for hundreds of students since he began teaching in 2002. Mike holds a bachelor of arts degree from the University of British Columbia and currently holds the MCSE: Security, CCNA, CCDA, CCNP, CCVP, IPTX, QoS, CCSI #31461, CIEH, and C T P certifications. He has completed the CCIE written exam. Mike was on the development team for the Cisco Unified Communications Architecture and Design official Cisco courseware and is currently developing custom Unified Communications courseware for Skyline. Mike coauthored the popular CCNA Exam Cram, second edition, first published in December 2005, as well as the third edition of that volume published in December 2007. A b o u t t h e T e c h n i c a l Editor Denise Donohue, CCIE No. 9566, is manager of Solutions Engineering for ePlus Technology in Maryland. She is responsible for designing and implementing data and VoIP networks and supporting companies based in the National Capital region. Prior to this role, she was a systems engineer for the data consulting arm of SBC/AT&T. Denise was a Cisco instructor and course director for Global Knowledge and did network consulting for many years. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 3. C C N A Voice Q u i c k Reference by Michael Valentine Introduction Introduction Voice over IP (VoIP) is no longer an interesting sidebar technology; it is a fact of day-to-day life for millions of people, some of whom are not even aware they are using it. Cisco has aggressively pursued the development and deployment of its Unified Communications suite of products and can now offer an integrated voice, video, and data solution for any business, whether it has just a few employees or a hundred thousand worldwide. The technology is reliable, user friendly, and exciting, but it is not simple—and a successful deployment requires that the designers, implementers, and administra- tors of a Unified Communications system know what they are doing. Training and certification of key staff are strategic components of any business plan to deploy a Unified Communications system. Until recently, the training track for Unified Communications went from the C C N A (the Associate-level routing and switching certification) straight to C C V P , the Professional-level voice certification. The transition between the certifi- cations was difficult for many, because the C C N A did not examine any Unified Communications topics, and the C C V P launched directly into advanced V o I P signaling protocols, Unified Communications Manager administration, traditional telephony, gateway and gatekeeper configuration, Q o S , and so on—all the while assuming that the student had a firm grasp of routing and switching concepts. I have met many good C C N A students who had no telephony or V o I P back- ground and consequently had great difficulty in the C C V P program. Likewise, many students with very strong traditional telephony experience were quickly lost in the intensive data concepts of the C C V P curriculum. It was clear to me and to many of my colleagues that the C C N A was not a good fit as a prerequisite to C C V P . All this brings us to some good decisions that were made regarding Cisco Unified Communications training and certifica- tion. The C C N A has itself been split into C C E N T and C C N A , with C C N A serving as the foundation to some new and specialized certifications at the Associate level. The I I U C curriculum prepares students for the C C N A Voice certification, which in turn is a solid preparation for and a much-needed transition to C C V P . © 2 0 0 8 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 4. CCNA Voice Quick Reference by Michael Valentine Introduction P u r p o s e of T h i s G u i d e This document serves as a roadmap of the CCNA Voice curriculum and a quick reference for the concepts and commands that apply to Cisco Unified Communications for small and medium-size businesses. This document is not a list of all the questions you may be asked on the exam, but you can be sure that the exam will touch on all the topics you find here. Reviewing this document should help you remember key points and commands you will need to know for the exam. W h o Should Read T h i s G u i d e Anyone who is preparing to take the CCNA Voice exam will find this guide useful. Some may use it as in introduction, and some as a refresher right before their test, some perhaps both. Data networkers who need a quick but complete intro- duction to Cisco Unified Communications for a small or medium-size business will find it useful as well. Those of you who are getting back into study mode for a C C V P exam may turn to this guide as a refresher, too. Then there are always those who simply want to learn something new. Whoever you are, welcome and enjoy the text. I hope you find it useful. Introduction to Unified Communications Today's work environment can be very different from what our parents experienced. The business environment is more competitive, with an unrelenting pressure to be more efficient, to react quickly, and to make important decisions instantly. Efficiencies can be gained by reducing costs, which in turn increases profit, but significant gains can also be made by investing in the business infrastructure so that productivity increases dramatically. Increased productivity means more opportunities to profit from a newfound competitive edge. This is known as Return on Investment, or ROI. The goal is to maximize the ROI—for every dollar spent, businesses want to see more dollars earned, or at least fewer dollars wasted. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 5. CCNA Voice Quick Reference by Michael Valentine Introduction One area in which businesses have found ways to improve their ROI is in their communications. The evolution of communications from traditional telephony, through cell phones, to smart phones and email, and now to Unified Communications, has created opportunities for businesses to access information and get it to workers instantly. Unified Communications puts voice, data, and video on a converged single network. This makes monitoring, administering, and maintaining the network simpler and more cost effective than if three separate systems existed. Unified Communications also puts powerful applications with information-distribution features right where they are needed. Workers today can be almost anywhere and can carry out meaningful or even critical tasks anywhere they can get a connection to the converged network. The next significant feature of a Unified Communications system is that it is easy to scale, adding more users, more loca- tions, and even more features. Because the Cisco Unified Communications system is a distributed collection of devices, functions, and features that are linked by common protocols, adding a new component is much simpler, and integration of the new component's capabilities and features can appear seamless to the people who use the system. The components required to create and use such a system are numerous and complex. Cisco has taken significant steps to develop, document, release, and support the various components as an integrated system. The next section examines the components of a Unified Communications system and introduces the devices and applications that make up the system. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 6. FIGURE 1 The Unified Communications Architecture © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 7. • Infrastructure Layer: This layer refers to the network itself, made up of connected switches, routers, and voice gateways. This is the converged network that carries data, voice, and video between users on the system. • Call-Processing Layer: This layer manages the signaling of voice and video calls. When a user picks up the phone and dials a number, the call processing agent determines how to route the call, instructs the phones to play dial tone or to ring, and records the details of the call for future analysis. The call agent carries out many other functions; it can be considered the equivalent of a traditional PBX system, but with many more features. • Applications Layer: This layer features elements such as voice mail, call-center applications, billing systems, time- card or training systems, and customer resource management applications—to name just some of the many applica- tions that can integrate with, draw from, or otherwise complement the Unified Communications systems. Because the Unified Communications systems are distributed (meaning not constrained to one box or even one location), the applications can be hosted almost anywhere, given appropriate connectivity. • Endpoint Layer: This layer includes the parts of the system that the users see, hear, or touch. This includes Cisco Unified IP Phones, PCs with software phones, video terminals, or other applications that send and receive informa- tion from the Unified Communications system. The following sections examine the layers in a little more detail. Infrastructure Layer At the infrastructure layer, we are building the connections between all the devices that send and receive data, voice, and video. These include Layer 2 and 3 switches, routers, and voice gateways. Voice gateways are among the most important components because they provide the connection to the PSTN or other network carriers. One of the critical functions (and one that is unfortunately often underemphasized in many deployments) is quality of service, or QoS. QoS provides service guarantees to various types of network traffic, in particular voice and video traffic. Without QoS, you can experi- ence poor call quality or even failed calls. Infrastructure design and deployment is literally the foundation of the system; © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 8. if any weaknesses exist here, they will manifest as system failures or unreliability. It is very important to build a solid and correct foundation. The goal is to achieve 99.999% uptime; achieving that goal takes careful attention and good design. Call Processing Layer The call processing layer is chiefly about the call agents. A call agent is not a person; it is an application that looks at the signaling traffic from devices that place and receive calls, and it determines what to do with the call. A Unified IP Phone sends a packet to the call agent when you lift the receiver; the call agent instructs the phone to play a dial tone. When you begin dialing a number to call, the call agent receives the digits and tries to find a match for the number in its dial plan. If the destination number is a phone that it controls, it tells the called device to ring. During the call, the call agent also sets up other services, such as Hold, Call Park, Transfer, Conference, and so on. The call agent also instructs the phones to tear down the call when one party hangs up. The call agent usually keeps detailed records of each call made; these are commonly used for billing purposes or troubleshooting. Cisco provides several options for call agents, matched to the size and requirements of the customer: • The Cisco Smart Business Communications System is designed for small businesses with up to 48 users. The system runs on the Cisco Unified Communications 500 Series for Small Business devices. • Cisco Unified Communications Manager Express serves up to 240 users and runs on the Integrated Services Router platforms. • Cisco Unified Communications Manager Business Edition handles up to 500 users and runs as a standalone installa- tion on a 7800-series Media Convergence server. • Cisco Unified Communications Manager can handle 30,000 or more users and runs on clusters of 7800-series Media Convergence servers. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 9. Smart Business Communications System FIGURE 2 The Smart Business Communications System—Image © Cisco The Smart Business Communications System is a group of specially designed, integrated devices that can provide high- quality routing, firewall, intrusion prevention, Power over Ethernet, wireless, and many WAN and PSTN connectivity options. It is essentially a solution-in-a-box, with a simple web-based interface that is largely plug and play. The Unified Communications 500 Series devices are small and inexpensive, providing the kind of connectivity options small busi- nesses need to allow them to take advantage of Unified Communications with a good ROI. The SBCS is expandable using 500-series switches, and the call agent software can support up to 48 phones. Voice mail and Auto-Attendant func- tions are provided by the integrated Cisco Unity Express application. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 10. Unified Communication Manager Express FIGURE 3 Cisco Integrated Services Routers for Unified Communications Manager Express— Image © Cisco Cisco Unified Communication Manager Express is a software feature that can run on the ISR-series router platforms, including the 800, 1800, 2800, 3800, and 7200-series platforms. The call agent application is embedded with the Cisco IOS software and is configured either from the command line or a Web-based interface. Unified CM Express is a full- featured call agent that is cost-effective, reliable, and scalable and integrates with both Service Provider connections and Unified Communications Manager clusters. With support for both H.323 and SIP protocols, site-to-site connections are possible in a variety of environments. The Unified CM Express system can be set up either as a PBX or a Key switch system, providing customers with a familiar experience that suits their operating environment. Unified Communications Manager, Business Edition Unified Communications Manager, Business Edition is a standalone installation of the Unified CM application and Cisco Unity Connection, coresident in a single M C S 7800-series appliance. This system can support up to 500 users in a single site or multisite centralized deployment and can be migrated to a full CM cluster if growth necessitates it. Unified CM Business Edition provides medium-size businesses with advanced features such as Mobility (a.k.a. Single Number © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 11. Reach), Do Not Disturb, Intercom Whisper, and Audible Message Waiting Indication, as well as speech recognition and integrated messaging. Because Unified CM Business Edition uses the same call agent software as a full cluster deploy- ment of Unified C M , it supports full integration with the other Unified Communications applications, such as Unified Presence, Unified Personal Communicator, MeetingPlace Express, Contact Center Express, and so on. Unified Communications Manager The full version of Unified Communications Manager is an enterprise-class, fully scalable, redundant, and robust distrib- uted packet-telephony application. Scalable to 30,000 users per cluster, with the capability to form intercluster connec- tions, it can support a global unified communications system for hundreds of thousands of endpoints. Unified CM versions prior to 5.x are Windows based, whereas versions 5.x and 6.x are Linux-based appliances. Applications Layer There are effectively a limitless number of applications that can be part of a Unified Communications system, because third-party applications can be developed to closely integrate with the Cisco suite of products. The following is a list of the more common applications found in a Unified Communications system: • Voice Mail: Voice mail can be provided using Cisco Unity, Unity Connection, or Unity Express. Unity and Unity Connection run on the MCS 7800 series platforms, and Unity Express is a self-contained module that is added to an ISR router and administered through the command line and GUI. The maximum mailboxes and recording time capacities vary depending on which module (either Advanced Integration Module or Network Module) is installed in the router. • Cisco Emergency Responder: This application tracks the location of an IP telephony device based on the physical switch port it is connected to. This information is attached to the caller information in the event the device calls 9 1 1 , which in turn allows 911 responders to locate the device (and therefore presumably the emergency) more precisely. 911 operation in a Unified Communications environment is a major design challenge because a VoIP phone system can easily throw out the premise that a PSTN call is placed from the same location as the phone that made it. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 12. Cisco Unified Contact Center [Express]: This is a call center application with full feature support for advanced call distribution, supervision, escalation and logging. Versions are available to support small and large call centers. • Cisco Unified Meeting Place [Express]: This is a full-featured web-conferencing application enabling voice and video conferencing as well as document sharing and collaboration, whiteboarding, and conference participant management. • Cisco Unified Presence: This extends the native capabilities of Unified CM 6.x+ to indicate presence information. The native capability includes on/off hook status in speed dials and call lists, whereas the full applications server provides detailed presence information as typically found in chat applications ("On the Phone," "Out to Lunch," "Do Not Disturb," and so on). Endpoints Layer An increasing variety of Cisco Unified IP Phones (and third-party IP phones) can be part of a Unified Communications deployment. All Cisco Unified IP Phones provide a display-based user interface, user customization, Power over Ethernet capability (where appropriate), and support for G.711 and G.729 codecs (and, on some models, Cisco Wideband and/or iLBC codecs). The following is a partial list and brief description of the Cisco Unified IP Phones available: Commercial/Retail Phones 7931G: 24 programmable buttons, 4-way LEDs, Dedicated HolaVTransfer/Redial buttons 7921G: Wireless, 2-in. color screen, speakerphone, XML-PTT, longer battery life Mobility 7921G: Wireless, 2-in. color screen, speakerphone, XML-PTT, longer battery life IP Communicator: Software-based IP Phone, emulates 7970G functionality © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 13. Business Class 7940G: B/W LCD, 2-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable 7941G: Higher resolution B/W LCD, 2-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable 7960G: B/W LCD, 6-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable 7961G: Higher resolution B/W LCD, 6-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable Advanced Media 7942G: Hi-fidelity audio, Hi-res display, 2-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable 7945G: Gig Ethernet, Hi-fidelity audio, Hi-res color display, 2-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable 7962G: Hi-fidelity audio, Hi-res display, 6-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable 7965G: Gig Ethernet, Hi-fidelity audio, Hi-res color display, 6-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable 7975G: Gig Ethernet, Hi-fidelity audio, backlit hi-res color display, 6-button, XML, SIP-capable Color Touch 7970G: Backlit hi-res color touch screen, 8-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable 7971G-GE: Gig Ethernet, Backlit hi-res color touch screen, 8-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable 7975G: Hi-fidelity audio, Backlit hi-res color touch screen, 8-button, XML-capable, SIP-capable Video 7985G: Personal desktop video phone Unified Video Advantage: Software IP Video Phone with support for attached camera Conference 7936G: Backlit LCD, 3 softkeys, small-medium conference needs 7937G: Hi-fidelity audio, extended audio coverage w/ extra mics, large display © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 14. Understanding Unified Communications Applications In this section, we examine the variety of applications available for integration in a Unified Communications environ- ment, including Messaging, Auto Attendant, Interactive Voice Response (IVR), Contact Center, Mobility, and Presence. Messaging A variety of messaging options are available to suit the needs of businesses small and large. The following table provides a summary of the options. Max. T D M PBX Product Users Messaging Capability Platform Integration? Networking? Redundancy? Unity Express 250 Voice Mail + Integrated Messaging ISR No Yes No Unity Connection 3000 Voice Mail + Integrated Messaging MCS Yes No No Unity 7500 Voice Mail + Integrated Messaging + MCS Yes Yes Yes per server Unified Messaging The following sections describe the messaging products listed in the table in more detail. Cisco Unity Express Unity Express is an ISR-based application that runs either on an AIM module or an NM module. AIM modules are connected to the main board as a daughter board addition and use flash memory for greetings and message storage. AIM modules therefore have less capacity for storage. NM modules are inserted into module bays in ISR routers, use a hard © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 15. disk for greeting and message storage, and have greater capacity for storage than A I M modules. Unity Express supports from 4 to 16 concurrent sessions and 12 to 250 mailboxes (dependent on the module and platform installed). Unity Express is managed through the command line or a web-based GUI. It allows users to view and sort their voice messages using the IP Phone display, email application, or IMAP client. Unity Express can be deployed in conjunction with Unified CM or CM Express and can supplement a full Unity deployment. Cisco Unity Connection Unity Connection is a medium-size business solution with a full range of messaging features. It can be deployed on its own or as a coresident installation as part of Unified Communications Manager Business Edition on suitable MCS plat- forms. When deployed as part of CM Business Edition, Unity Connection supports up to 500 users; when deployed as a standalone application, Unity connection supports up to 3000 users per server (dependent on hardware). Scalability is achieved by networking up to 10 other Unity messaging products of any type. Fourteen languages are supported for deployments worldwide. Unity Connection also supports speech recognition, allowing users to speak commands to manage their messages hands-free. Multiple interfaces are supported for managing messages from an IP Phone, an email client, a web GUI, or Cisco Unified Personal Communicator. Users can define their own rules to transfer calls based on caller, time of day, and Microsoft Exchange calendar status. Cisco Unity Unity is the enterprise-class messaging application with support for up to 7500 users per server and up to 250,000 users in a multi server networked environment. Interoperability with legacy voice-mail systems, notably Octel and Nortel systems, allows a phased transition to IP messaging with minimal disruption to users. Unity supports 35 languages, facili- tating deployments worldwide. Full unified messaging is possible with connectors for Exchange, Notes, and GroupWise, providing a single inbox for email, voice mail, and fax messages. Text-to-speech capability allows users to have their emails read to them over the phone by the RealSpeech engine; speech recognition is also available so users can instruct Unity to play, search, or record messages hands-free. Secure messaging is supported, allowing encrypted messages and preventing messages that have expired from being played. Access to messages is made simple, intuitive, and possible from almost anywhere. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 16. Auto Attendant An Auto Attendant is basically an advanced answering machine; instead of only one message, it can play several, depend- ing on the date and time, which number was called, and most importantly, what numbers the callers pressed in response to the greeting they heard. If you have ever heard: "For service in English, press I. Pour service en Francais, appuyez sur le 2 . . . , " you have been served by an Auto Attendant. Typically, Auto Attendants allow callers to select the department or extension they want to call, and often they allow the caller to spell out a first or last name to search in the company direc- tory. Cisco Unity, Unity Connection, and Unity Express all provide Auto Attendant functionality; Unity and Unity Connection include a simple web interface that makes it very easy to construct menus and test to see that they work as you intended. Cisco Unified IP IVR Although Auto Attendants are useful, their functionality is limited to pretty basic menu navigation. To scale this function- ality up to call-center size, and especially to include speech recognition, prompt-and-collect ("Please enter your 10-digit account number, followed by the # sign"), Text-to-Speech, database integration, and Java application integration, a much more advanced IVR application is required. Cisco Unified IP IVR has all these advanced capabilities. Call centers that have a high call volume and many possible queues of callers waiting for different agent capabilities can effectively deploy Unified IP IVR to steer callers to the correct agent, or perhaps to an automated information source without the need to tie up an agent at all. Unified IP IVR includes the capability to provide both real-time and historical reports on its utilization and offers multiple-language support. Cisco Unified Customer Voice Portal For the very largest call centers, the Unified CVP product provides advanced IVR, including speech recognition, advanced queuing, integration with Cisco Unified Contact Center (Enterprise and Hosted), and powerful call routing, management, and reporting features. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 17. Cisco Unified Contact Center Cisco provides a range of Contact Center products for S M B , Enterprise, and Service Provider applications. Customer contact solutions provide multiple avenues to reach and interact with customers, including basic telephony as well as feature-rich web, email, and even video interaction. The three Contact Center products are described next: • Cisco Unified Contact Center Express: Suitable for 10 to 300 agents, it provides sophisticated call routing, outbound dialing capabilities, comprehensive contact management, and chat and web collaboration in a single- server, integrated "contact center in a box." • Cisco Unified Contact Center Enterprise: Provides intelligent contact routing, call treatment, network-to-desktop computer telephony integration (CTI), and multichannel contact management. It combines multichannel automatic call distributor (ACD) functionality. Sophisticated monitoring allows customers to be routed to the most appropriate agent (based on real-time conditions such as agent skills, availability, and queue lengths) anywhere in the enterprise, regardless of the agent's location. • Cisco Unified Contact Center Hosted: An application hosted by service providers, who then lease its functionality to customers who want a virtual contact center without the need to manage and maintain it themselves. Subscribing business customers can have IP or time-division multiplexing (TDM) infrastructures or a combination of the two. Contact Center Hosted provides all the advanced capabilities found in Contact Center Enterprise. Cisco Unified Mobile Solutions Today's workforce is mobile, distributed, and utilizes multiple technologies to communicate. The desire to have a seam- less transition between the various ways in which people can be reached has spurred the development of mobility features in Cisco Unified Communications. The key products are the following: • Cisco Unified Mobility: (a.k.a Single Number Reach) Allows multiple remote destinations (commonly a cell phone, a home office phone, or other work location) to be configured to ring at the same time as the worker's enterprise © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 18. desk phone. Thus, when a customer calls your work number while you are on your way to a meeting, your cell phone can ring and you can answer without the customer realizing you are away from your desk. Furthermore, if you return to your desk, you can simply pick up your desk phone and continue the call. A related feature, called Cisco Mobile Voice Access, allows users to place calls from their enterprise desk phone from a remote location or a cell phone. By dialing a configured number and entering an access code, the enterprise system will prompt for the number you want to call, and the call will be placed as if you were at your desk. This is useful not only for presenting the preferred Caller-ID number to the customer, but also potentially for long-distance toll savings. • Cisco Unified Personal Communicator: A desktop PC (or Mac) application that combines a software IP Phone, IM client, video, and online collaboration capabilities. Presence indications ("Busy," "In a call," "Away," "Do Not Disturb," and so on) can save time and enhance productivity because users can see the status of the person they want to contact before trying to reach them. Integration with an Outlook toolbar provides click-to-call or click-to-chat from a message or contact. • Cisco Unified IP Communicator: A fully functioned software IP Phone, often characterized as a "7970 under glass." Users can place and receive calls from their PCs from anywhere that connectivity to the call agent can be established. This is typically achieved through a VPN connection; it is perfectly possible to place a call from an airport boarding lounge or your local coffee shop. Unified IP Communicator can be enhanced with Unified Video Advantage, which integrates a PC webcam for video calls. • Cisco Unified Mobile Communicator: An application for smart mobile phones that provides access to enterprise directories, presence indicators, secure text/chat, voice-mail access, call history of any of the user's phones displayed on the mobile handset, and collaboration and conferencing integration with Unified Meeting Place. • Cisco Unified Presence: A server-based application that extends the on/off hook status monitoring capability of Unified CM 6.x to include IM-like status messages. Status indications can be displayed or integrated with Personal Communi- cator, Mobile Communicator, IP Phone Messenger, the Microsoft Office Connector, and IBM Sametime Communicator. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 19. nified Communications Applications Cisco Telepresence Cisco Telepresence is a state-of-the-art high-definition videoconferencing system. A specially designed system of furniture, cameras, monitors, and microphones creates a life-sized illusion of a meeting whose participants may be half a world apart. With 1080p HD video, CD-quality spatial audio, and high-quality lighting, the experience is dramatic to say the least. In combination with the Telepresence Multipoint Switch, up to 36 locations can be included in a single conference with near- zero latency. This can only be described as a high-end solution, with commensurate demands on bandwidth. FIGURE 4 The Cisco Telepresence 3000 System—Image © Cisco © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 20. Understanding Traditional Telephony This section introduces traditional telephony systems, concepts, and applications. The PSTN FIGURE 5 Public Switched Telephone Network A Representation of the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) The PSTN, or Public Switched Telephone Network, is made up of Central Office switches to which subscriber lines are connected. The CO switch is programmed so that it knows which phone number (subscriber line) is attached to a particu- lar port. If the number called is not on the local switch, the call is routed over an interoffice trunk to another switch, which may have the called subscriber line connected directly to it or may in turn route the call to other CO switches. Telephone numbering plans are organized so that calls are routed efficiently through the switch system to the correct destination switch. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 21. Note that for our purposes, a line connects to a single phone number and supports one call at a time, whereas a trunk interconnects two switches and supports multiple calls at a time. Business Telephony Systems Businesses have more elaborate requirements of the telephone beyond simply placing calls. Over time, two main types of business systems have evolved: the PBX and the Key System. Both have their place, and both offer calling features that make it easier to carry on business both internally and externally with staff, customers, and suppliers. PBX Systems FIGURE 6 A Representation of a PBX System Business telephone systems often use a Private Branch Exchange (PBX) switch, usually located in their building. The PBX is configured in much the same way as the PSTN CO switch: it holds the dial plan for all numbers within the busi- ness, and external calls are routed over a CO trunk to the PSTN CO switch if the called number is not on the PBX. As a business grows, it is common to install another PBX in another location or building and set up a special trunk (called a tie-line or tie-trunk) between the PBXs so that calls to the remote location are still internal numbers (typically 4- or 5- digit numbers) instead of PSTN calls. A PBX consists of a control plane (the "brain"), a terminal interface that connects phones to the features they want to use, a switching engine that determines which port to route a call out, line cards to connect to phones, and trunk cards to © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 22. CCNA Voice Quick Reference by Michael Valentine Understanding Traditional Telephony connect to the PSTN or to tie trunks to other PBXs. PBXs come in a variety of sizes, supporting from 10 to 20,000 phones. All PBXs offer basic calling features, with additional advanced features optional based on hardware capability and licensing. These features typically include Hold, Transfer, Conference, Park, Voice Mail, and so forth. Key Systems Smaller businesses will sometimes use a key system. A key system is like a PBX in that it controls a group of local phones, but key systems tend to have fewer features than PBXs. One characteristic of key systems that many businesses specifically request is distributed answering from any phone; that is, all the phones ring at once, and whoever is able to pick up Line 2 (for example) can push the Line 2 button on any phone and take the call. PBXs don't normally do this; they have a central answering point (a receptionist or Auto Attendant) and Direct Inward Dial numbers (DIDs) if needed. Telephony Signaling Telephony signaling refers to the messages that must be sent to set up and tear down a phone call—that is, anything other than the actual voice. Following are the three types of telephony signaling: • Supervisory: Communicates the current state of the telephony device. There are three types of supervisory signals: • On-Hook: The phone is hung up. Only the ringer is active in this state. (Note that if the speakerphone button is pressed, this is the same as being off-hook.) • Off-Hook: The phone receiver is out of the cradle. This signals the phone switch (PSTN, PBX, or Key) that the phone wants to make a call; the switch sends a dial tone to indicate that it is ready to receive digits. • Ringing: The switch sends voltage to the phone to make it ring, alerting the user that there is an inbound call. The other end of the call hears a ringback tone. • Address: Communicates the digits that were dialed. Address signaling is most commonly done using Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) tones, commonly known as TouchTone dialing. The combination of tones tells the switch what number was pressed. Older systems also support pulse dialing, which is what the old-fashioned rotary dial © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 23. CCNA Voice Quick Reference by Michael Valentine Understanding Traditional Telephony phones used. Pulse dialing works by repeatedly opening and closing the circuit to the phone switch; the switch counts the number of pulses and interprets that as the number dialed. You might have seen in really old movies when someone picks up the phone and taps the receiver cradle repeatedly; this was how you got the attention of the operator. • Informational: Communicates the call status to participants in the call. Informational signals include dial tone, ring- back tone, and reorder tone. These tones, and others not mentioned here, will vary from country to country. In England, for example, ringback tone sounds very different from what would be heard in North America. Signaling System 7 (SS7) SS7 is a global telephony standard that allows a phone call to be routed between CO switches, between long-distance carriers, and even between national telephone providers in other countries. SS7's primary role is to complete the setup and teardown of phone calls; this is quite a distinct process from the actual transport of the voice signal. In fact, the call control information in an SS7 network must traverse an entirely separate network from the voice path. The capabilities of SS7 have allowed the introduction of relatively complex value-added services, such as call screening, number portability, and prepaid calling cards. PSTN Call Setup To make a PSTN call, several steps occur that the caller is unaware of. The following steps refer to Figure 7. 0 FIGURE 7 PSTN Call Setup Customer Telephone © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 24. 1. The calling phone goes off-hook, closing the circuit to the local CO switch. 2. The local CO switch detects that current is flowing over the closed circuit and sends a dial tone to the calling phone. 3. Address signals (DTMF or pulse) are sent as the calling party dials the called number. 4. The local CO switch collects the digits and makes its routing decision; in this example, it uses an SS7 lookup to locate the destination CO switch. 5. Supervisory signaling indicates to the far-end trunk that a call is inbound. 6. The PBX determines which internal line the call should go to and causes the connected phone to ring. 7. The ringback tone is heard at the calling party end. 8. The called party goes off-hook, and a voice circuit is established end-to-end. The fact that all this happens with very high reliability billions of times every day is pretty impressive. It also provides some insight into how complex it is to duplicate these functions in a VoIP system. More on that later. Numbering Plans NOTE A numbering plan is an organized distribution of telephone numbers administered by a regional or national authority. The Codes do not always plan defines the rules that allocate numbers according to an established international telecommunications standard. For need to be dialed; Local example, the North American Numbering Plan defines a country code of 1, followed by a three-digit area code, a three- numbers must always be digit office code, and a four-digit local number. There are numerous other numbering plans for other countries or regions dialed. of the world. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 25. The North American Numbering Plan Let's look at the N A N P in more detail. The 10-digit number is made up of the 3-digit area code, the 3-digit office code, and the 4-digit local number, as shown here: NXX-NXX-XXXX NOTE It is very important to note that the " N " represents any digit in the range 2 through 9, and the " X " represents any digit 0 Several other ranges are through 9. You will never find an office or area code of OXX or 1XX; those numbers are either reserved for specialized reserved for specialized purposes or would interfere with things like operator access numbers. Several ranges are also reserved for Easily purposes. One commonly Recognizable Codes (ERCs); these are numbers where the second and third numbers of the area code are the same. They recognized one is 555- are used for special services—for example, 800, 888, 877, and 866 are toll-free numbers. Another recognizable assign- 01XX, which is used in film and TV, demonstra- ment is the " N i l " series: this includes 4 1 1 , 6 1 1 , and 911 numbers that are not used as area codes but for other special tions, or education. No assignments, such as information or emergency services. actual customer is assigned these numbers, so calling a number seen in a movie will not pose a E.164 Addressing nuisance to anyone. When The E.164 addressing scheme is an international standard for telephone numbering plans, originally developed by the Tommy Tutone recorded International Telecommunication Union. An E.164 number contains the following components: "867-5309/Jenny," he immediately annoyed CC—Country Code thousands of phone NDC—National Designation Code customers worldwide. SN—Subscriber Number An E.164 number is standardized at 15 digits, generating over 100 trillion unique strings. In theory, it's possible to direct dial any conventional phone in the world from any other conventional phone. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 26. Introduction to Analog Circuits Analog (in contrast to digital) circuits are still the most common telephone connections worldwide. The phone line to a North American home is most commonly an analog loop circuit, although more and more digital phone services are being installed. Cisco gateways must connect to various analog services to place calls to the PSTN; the analog circuits that Cisco supports are Foreign Exchange Station (FXS), Foreign Exchange Office (FXO), and Earth and Magneto (E&M). This section examines the components of an analog telephone and the signaling methods used by analog circuits. Components of an Analog Phone An analog phone includes the following components: • Receiver: The handset speaker • Transmitter: The handset microphone • 2-wire/4-wire hybrid: Converts 2-wire from the CO to 4-wire in the phone • Dialer (tone/pulse): The dialing keypad or rotary dial • Switch hook: The switch that closes/opens the circuit (off-hook/on-hook) • Ringer: Sounds to indicate inbound call Foreign Exchange Station An FXS port connects directly to an analog phone or fax machine. Switches (including CO switches and PBXs) and Cisco gateways will have FXS ports to connect an analog phone. The switch or FXS gateway port must provide power, call progress tones, and dial tone to the analog device. An FXS port on a gateway is also the direct connection to the VoIP network and consequently also contains a coder-decoder (Codec) to convert the analog signal to digital for packetization. Alternatively, a Cisco Analog Telephony Adapter can serve as a remote FXS-to-Ethernet converter to connect an analog station to the VoIP network. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 27. Foreign Exchange Office An F X O port connects to the PSTN CO switch. If you want to connect your gateway router to the phone company over standard analog lines (that you could plug your analog phone into), you use F X O ports. These ports allow the gateway to place and receive calls to/from the PSTN. FXO ports also include a codec. FIGURE 8 Loop-Start Signaling Loop-start signaling is commonly associated with local loop circuits (such as an analog line to the PSTN); it is seldom seen on trunk connections. A local loop is a two-wire service that uses very simple electrical signaling; remember that this technology has been in use and substantially unchanged for 100 years! © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 28. Following is the loop-start process: 1. A phone that is on-hook breaks the electrical circuit; we say opens the circuit. No electricity can flow because of the open circuit. 2. When the receiver is lifted, the circuit closes and electricity flows. This current is - 4 8 V DC. The CO switch that is connected to the local loop detects the current flow and interprets this as an attempt to place a call—we say "seize a circuit." The CO switch plays dial tone down the line to the phone as an indication that it is prepared to collect digits. 3. If the phone is on-hook and the CO switch has a call inbound for it, the CO switch applies 90V AC current to the open circuit; because it is AC, the current can be applied even on the open circuit. By the way, this is why you should not have an analog phone near the bath. The DC voltage won't do much, but you will definitely know it if the phone rings and you get zapped by the AC voltage. Loop-start works very well for homes or other lightly used circuits, but if it is in constant use, a problem known as glare can occur; this refers to both ends of the circuit being seized at the same time, so that you pick up the phone and there is a caller on the line at the same moment, by coincidence. Ground-Start Signaling Ground-start signaling is an adaptation of loop-start. Instead of the circuit being closed only at the phone end, both ends of the circuit have the capability to detect current, and both ends can request and confirm the use of the circuit. This is achieved by both ends being able to ground one of the wires in the circuit. These wires (or leads) are referred to as Tip and Ring. These terms date back to the use of 1/4-inch jacks with a positive contact at the tip and a negative conductor in the ring. The advantage is that it makes glare much less likely, and consequently ground-start is appropriate for trunk connections that are heavily used. However, it is very rare to see a ground-start trunk in a VoIP network or indeed in any new trunk deployment. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 29. FIGURE 9 Ground-Start Signaling The ground-start process as it occurs on a trunk between a PBX and the CO switch is described next; refer to the diagram for each step: 1. The PBX has a call that it must send to the PSTN. It signals to the CO switch that there is an inbound call by grounding the ring lead. 2. The CO senses the ring lead as grounded and grounds the tip lead to signal the PBX that it is ready to receive the call. 3. The PBX senses the tip ground and closes the loop between tip and ring in response; the PBX also removes the ring ground. 4. The voice circuit is complete, and communication can begin. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 30. E&M Signaling Variously called "Ear and Mouth," "RecEive and TransMit," and "Earth and Magneto," E & M analog trunks were typi- cally used to interconnect PBXs (tie-trunks). E & M connections have separate leads for signaling and voice; the signaling leads are known as the E and M leads. In an E & M connection, one side is called the trunk side; this is usually the PBX side. The other side is called the signaling-unit side; this is the CO, channel-bank, or Cisco gateway E & M interface. The E lead is used to indicate to the trunk side that the signaling-unit side has gone off-hook; conversely, the M lead is used to indicate to the signaling-unit side that the trunk side has gone off-hook. Five types of E & M signaling exist, numbered Type I through Type V. In a Cisco Gateway application, Types II and V can be connected back-to-back and Type I cannot be. Cisco does not support Type IV. Three main techniques are employed in E & M circuit signaling: • Wink Start: The terminating side (for example, a Cisco Gateway) uses a brief off-hook-on-hook "wink" to acknowledge that the originating side (for example, a PBX) has gone off-hook. Upon receipt of the wink, the origi- nating side begins sending digits. When the far-end device answers the call, the terminating side goes off-hook and the voice circuit is then set up. • Immediate Start: The originating side goes off-hook, waits a set time (perhaps 200ms), and then begins sending digits whether or not the terminating side is ready. • Delay Dial: Assume that a PBX is placing a call outbound to the PSTN: First, the PBX goes off-hook. The CO then goes off-hook until it is ready to receive digits; it then goes on-hook. (This time period is the delay dial signal.) The PBX sends digits. When the far-end device answers the call, the CO goes off-hook (called Answer Supervision), and the voice circuit is then set up. The advantage of Delay Dial is that some equipment is not ready to receive digits instantly, even though it has sent the wink; the delay compensates for this. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 31. Introduction to Digital Circuits Digital circuits have the chief advantage of allowing a much higher density of calls on a given physical connection; an analog circuit can handle only one call at a time, whereas a digital circuit can handle many. There are two main types of digital circuits: Common Channel Signaling (CCS) and Channel Associated Signaling (CAS). CAS circuits are available in two speeds: Tl at 1.544Mbs supports 24 calls, and El at 2.048Mbs supports 30 calls. (For these values, we are assuming the calls are not compressed; more on this later). CCS circuits are designated as PRI T l , PRI E l , and BRI. A PRI Tl can support 23 calls, a PRI El 30, and a BRI only 2. The use of a digital circuit by definition implies that the voice signal must be digitized; the conversion from analog to digital is performed by a codec. The following sections discuss the conversion of analog to digital. Digitizing Analog Signals There are four steps in the process of digitizing analog sound: 1. Sample the analog sound at regular intervals 2. Quantize the sample 3. Encode the value into a binary expression 4. Optionally compress the sample Sampling could be done any number of times per second; the more samples taken per second, the higher the audio quality, but the amount of digital data produced is much larger. Nyquist's theorem states that the sampling interval should be 2x the highest frequency of the sample to produce acceptable audio quality during playback. Because the highest frequency in human speech that we want to reproduce in telephony is around 4000 Hz, the sampling rate for standard toll- quality digital voice is 8000 intervals per second. By contrast, CD music audio, which must encode both much higher and much lower frequencies, samples at about 192,000 times per second. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 32. Quantizing refers to making a digital approximation of an analog waveform. Imagine drawing an arc on a chessboard; if you had to define the arc using only the square it was in for each row (segment) and column (interval), you would end up with a stepped pattern that was sort of close to the original arc but not exact. This is exactly the process that happens with quantization: the codec chooses a segment value that is as close as possible to the analog value at the interval it was sampled, but it cannot be exact. To make the quantization more accurate, each sample is divided into 16 intervals that are adjusted to more closely match the sampled wave. Furthermore, the segments are actually more fine-grained at the origin than at the high and low ranges. This is because most of the human speech we are trying to capture accurately is in this center range of the scale; there are fewer sounds at the very highest and lowest values. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 33. FIGURE 11 Quantizing the Digital Sample Encoding the signal is a simple process. We have a single 8-bit code word to identify whether the analog signal was a positive or negative voltage, what value the signal was quantized to (which segment), and finally, which interval is repre- sented by the code word. The first bit identifies either positive voltage (1) or negative (0). The next three bits represent the segment. There are eight segments in the positive range and eight segments on the negative range, so three bits provide the necessary encoding for the quantization. The last four bits identify the interval. A code word example is shown next: 10011100 In this case, the first 1 indicates a positive voltage; the next digits of 001 indicate this is the first segment (on the positive side), and 1100 indicates the twelfth interval. The code word is 8 bits; we generate a code word 8000 times per second (the sample rate). This gives us a bitrate output of 8 x 8000 = 64,000 bps (64 kbps). The process we just described is known as Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) and is the standard for uncompressed digital voice in telephony. One voice stream thus requires 64k of bandwidth for transport. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 34. NOTE Compression is not a required step, but it is often done to save bandwidth in VoIP environments. The two main types of The determination of compression we are concerned with are the following: voice quality is based on the Mean Opinion Score • Adaptive Differential P C M (ADPCM): This method does not send entire code words, but instead sends a smaller (MOS). This is a subjec- code that represents the difference between this word and the last one sent. This is not commonly used today, tive measurement, because it produces lower voice quality and compresses down only to about 16 kbps. created by gathering the opinion of live human • Conjugate Structure Algebraic Code Excited Linear Prediction (CS_ACELP): As the name suggests, this is listeners. A sample more complex compression. Based on a dictionary or codebook of known sounds made by a standardized American recording is played, and male voice, the digital sample is analyzed and compared to the dictionary. The dictionary code that is the closest to the listeners give it a score out of 5, where 5 is the sample is sent. The codebook is constantly learning. The output of this compression is typically 8 kbps—with best. The same sample is very little degradation of voice quality. This compression is widely used in VoIP. played using different compression or process- ing methods and scored again. Because MOS is Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) so subjective, other T D M is the primary technology used in traditional digital voice; it is also extensively used in data circuits. The basic quality measurements exist that are more premise is to take pieces of multiple streams of digital data and interleave them on a single transmission medium. empirical and more accu- rate. For reference, stan- T1 Circuits dard PCM encoding (G.711) scores 4.1, and On a Tl circuit, there are up to 24 channels available for voice. 64k from conversation 1 is loaded into the first Tl G.729 scores 3.92. channel, then 64k from the conversation 2 is loaded into the second channel, and so on. If not enough conversations exist to fill the available channels, they are padded with null values. The 24 channels are grouped together as a frame. Depending on the implementation, either 12 frames are grouped together as a larger frame (called SuperFrame or SF), or © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 35. 24 frames are grouped together (called Extended SuperFrame or ESF). T l s are typically full duplex, with two wires sending and the other two wires receiving. E1 Circuits An El is very similar to a T l . There are 32 channels, of which 30 can be used for voice. (The other two are used for framing and signaling, respectively.) The 32 channels are grouped together as a frame, and 16 frames are grouped together as a multiframe. El circuits are common in Europe and Mexico, with some El services becoming available in the United States. Channel Associated Signaling (CAS)—T1 Although the 64 k channels of a Tl are intended to carry digitized voice, we must also be able to transmit signaling infor- mation, such as on-hook and off-hook, addressing, and so forth. In CAS circuits, the least significant bit of each channel in every sixth frame is "stolen" to generate signaling bit strings. SF implementation takes 12 frames and creates a SuperFrame. Using one bit per channel in every sixth frame gives two 12-bit signaling strings (known as A and B) per SuperFrame. The A and B strings are used to signal basic status, addressing, and supervisory messages. In ESF, 24 chan- nels are in an Extended SuperFrame, which gives A, B, C, and D signaling strings. These can be used to signal more advanced supervisory functions. Because CAS takes one bit from each channel in every sixth frame, it is known as Robbed Bit Signaling (RBS). Using RBS means that a slight degradation occurs in voice quality because every sixth frame has only 7 instead of 8 bits to represent the sample; however, this is not generally a perceptible degradation. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 36. Channel Associated Signaling (CAS)—T1 El signaling is slightly different. In an El CAS circuit, the first channel (channel 0 or timeslot 1) is reserved for framing information. The 17th channel (channel 16 or timeslot 17) contains signaling information—no bits are robbed from the individual channels. Timeslots 2 - 1 6 and 18-32 carry the voice data. Each channel has specific bits in timeslot 17 for signaling. This means that although El CAS does not use RBS, it is still considered C A S ; however, the signaling is out- of-band in its own timeslot. Common Channel Signaling (CCS) CCS provides for a completely out-of-band signaling channel. This is the function of the D channel in an ISDN PRI or BRI implementation. The full 64 k of bandwidth per channel is available for voice; instead of generating A B C D bits, a protocol known as Q.931 is used out-of-band in a separate channel for signaling. An ISDN PRI Tl provides 23 voice channels of 64 k each (called Bearer or B channels) and one 64 k D (for Data) channel (timeslot 24) for signaling. An ISDN PRI El provides 30 B channels and 1 D channel (timeslot 17); an ISDN BRI circuit provides two 64 k B channels and one D channel of 16 k. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 37. U n d e r s t a n d i n g VoIP The elements of traditional telephony—status, address and supervisory signaling, digitization, and so on—must have functional parallels in the VoIP world for systems to function as people expect them to, and more importantly, for VoIP to interact with the PSTN properly. This section examines packetizing digital voice, signaling, and transport protocols, the components of a VoIP network, and the factors that can cause problems in VoIP networks and how they can be mitigated. Understanding Packetization IP networks move data around in small pieces known as packets. Because we know how to digitize our voice, it now becomes just another binary payload to move around in a packet. VoIP uses Digital Signal Processors (DSP) for the codec functions. The digitized voice is then packaged in an appropriate protocol structure to move it through the IP infrastructure. DSPs DSPs are specialized chips that perform high-speed codec functions. DSPs are found in the IP phones to encode the analog speech of the user and to decode the digitized contents of the packets arriving from the other end of the call. DSPs are also used on IOS gateways at the interface to PSTN circuits, to change from a digital circuit to packetized voice, or from an analog circuit to packetized voice. DSPs also change from one codec to another, allow conferencing and call park, and other telephony features. DSPs are a vital component of a VoIP system. Different chip types have varying capacities, but the general rule is that you want as many D S P resources available to you as possible. The D S P calculator on cisco.com will help you calculate what you must have. Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) RTP was developed to better serve real-time traffic such as voice and video. Voice payloads are encapsulated by RTP, then by UDP, then by IP. A Layer 2 header of the correct format is applied; the type obviously depends on the link technology in use by each router interface. A single voice call generates two one-way RTP/UDP/IP packet streams. U D P provides multiplexing and checksum capability; RTP provides payload identification, timestamps, and sequence numbering. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 38. Payload identification allows us to treat voice traffic differently from video, for example, simply by looking for the RTP header label, simplifying our configuration tasks. Timestamping and sequence numbering allows VoIP devices to reorder RTP packets that arrived out of sequence and play them back with the same timing in which they were recorded, elimi- nating delays or jerkiness. There is no provision for retransmission of a lost RTP packet. Each RTP stream is accompanied by a Real-Time Transport Control Protocol (RTCP) stream. RTCP monitors the quality of the RTP stream, allowing devices to record events such as packet count, delay, loss, and jitter (delay variation). A single voice packet by default contains a payload of 20 msec of voice (either uncompressed or compressed). Because sampling is occurring at 8000 times per second, 20 msec gives us 160 samples. If we divide 8000 by 160, we see that we are generating 50 packets with 160 bytes of payload, per second, for a one-way voice stream. If we use compression, we can squeeze the 160-byte payload down to 20 bytes using the G.729 codec. We still have 160 samples, still 20 msec of audio, but reduced payload size. Codecs The codecs supported by Cisco include the following: • G.711 (64kbps)—Toll-quality voice, uncompressed. • G.729 (8kbps) • Annex A variant: less processor-intensive, allows more voice channels encoded per DSP chip; lower audio quality than G.729 • Annex B variant: Allows the use of Voice Activity Detection and Comfort Noise Generation; can be applied to G.729 or G.729-A The values for bandwidth shown do not include the Layer 3 and Layer 2 overhead; the actual bandwidth used by a single (one-way) voice stream can be significantly larger. The following tables summarize the additional overhead added by packetization and Layer 2 encapsulation (assume 50 packets per second (pps): © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 39. Bandwidth Calculation, Without Layer 2 Codec G.711 G.729 Voice Payload 160 Bytes 20 Bytes RTP Header 12 Bytes 12 Bytes UDP Header 8 Bytes 8 Bytes IP Header 20 Bytes 20 Bytes Total Before Layer 2 200 Bytes 60 Bytes Total Bitrate @ 50 pps 80,000 bps (80 kbps) 24,000 bps (24 kbps) Bandwidth Calculation, With Layer 2 Layer 2 Type G.711 = 2 0 0 Bytes/packet G.729 = 60 Bytes/packet Ethernet 18 Bytes 18 Bytes Multilink PPP 6 Bytes 6 Bytes Frame Relay FRF. 12 6 Bytes 6 Bytes Total incl. Layer 2 218 Bytes 206 Bytes 206 Bytes 78 Bytes 66 Bytes 66 Bytes Total Bitrate incl. Layer 2 87.200 82,400 82,400 31,200 26,400 26,400 (@ 50 pps) (87.2 kbps) (82.4 kbps) (82.4 kbps) (31.2 kbps) (26.4 kbps) (26.4 kbps) When using G.729, the RTP/UDP/IP header of 40 bytes is twice the size of the 20B voice payload. This consumes signif- icant bandwidth just for header transmission on a slow link. The recommended solution is to use Compressed RTP (cRTP) on slow WAN links. cRTP reduces the RTP/UDP/IP header to 2 bytes without checksums or 4 bytes with check- sums. The effect of using cRTP is illustrated in the following table. (Note: Ethernet is not included because it is not clas- sified as a slow link.) © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 40. Bandwidth Calculation, Using cRTP Codec G.711 G.729 Voice Payload 160 Bytes 20 Bytes cRTP header w/ chksum 4 Bytes 4 Bytes cRTP header no chksum 2 Bytes 2 Bytes Total before Layer 2: 164 Bytes 162 Bytes 24 Bytes 22 Bytes Multilink PPP or Frame Relay FRF. 12 6 Bytes 6 Bytes Total WAN bandwidth @50 pps incl. Layer 2: 68000 bps 67,200 bps 12,000 bps 11,200 (68 kbps) (67.2 kbps) (12 kbps) (11.2 kbps) Voice Activity Detection (VAD) Phone conversations on average include about 3 5 % silence. In Cisco Unified Communications, by default silence is pack- etized and transmitted, consuming the same bandwidth as speech. In situations where bandwidth is very scarce, the VAD feature can be enabled, causing the voice stream to be stopped during periods of silence. The theory here is that the band- width otherwise used for silence can be reclaimed for voice or data transmission. VAD also adds Comfort Noise Generation (CNG), which fills in the dead silence created by the stopped voice flow with white noise. VAD should not be taken into account during the network design bandwidth allocation process because its effectiveness varies with back- ground noise and speech patterns. VAD is also made ineffective by Music on Hold and fax features. In reality, VAD typi- cally causes more problems than it solves, and it is usually wiser to add the necessary bandwidth. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 41. Additional DSP Functions In addition to digitizing voice, D S P resources are used for the following: • Conferencing: DSPs mix the audio streams from the conference participants and transmit the mix (minus their own) to each participant. • Transcoding and Media Termination Points (MTP): A transcoder changes a packetized audio stream from one codec to another, perhaps for transit across a slow WAN link. MTPs provide a point for the stream to be terminated while other services are set up. • Echo Cancellation: DSPs provide the calculation power needed to analyze the audio stream and filter out the repeti- tive patterns that indicate echo. Echo is a chief cause of perceived poor voice quality; echo cancellation is an impor- tant function. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 42. I n t r o d u c i n g VoIP Signaling Protocols VoIP signaling protocols are responsible for call setup, maintenance, and teardown. A number of different protocols are in use—some standards-based, others proprietary, and each with advantages and disadvantages. The following sections introduce the signaling protocols you should know about, including SCCP, H.323, MGCP, and SIP. VoIP Signaling Protocols VoIP signaling protocols handle the call setup, maintenance, and teardown functions of VoIP calls. It is important to keep in mind that the signaling functions are an entirely separate packet stream from the actual voice bearer path (RTP). The signaling protocol in use must pass the supervisory, informational, and address information expected in any telephony system. VoIP signaling protocols are either peer-to-peer or client-server; in the case of peer-to-peer protocols, the endpoints have the intelligence to perform the call-control signaling themselves, Client-server protocols send event notifications to the call agent (the Unified CM server) and receive instructions on what actions to perform in response. The following table summarizes the characteristics of the four signaling protocols dealt with here. Inter-Vendor Implemented Implemented Protocol Standard? Compatibility on Gateways on Cisco IP Phones Operating Mode H.323 Yes--ITU Very Good Yes No Peer-to-Peer MGCP Yes--IETF Good Yes No Client/Server SIP Yes--IETF Basic Yes Yes; also third-party phones Peer-to-Peer SCCP N o - -Cisco Proprietary Cisco only Some Cisco IP Phones only Client/Server H.323 H.323 is not itself a protocol; it is an umbrella standard that defines several other related protocols for specific tasks. Originally conceived as a multimedia signaling protocol to emulate traditional telephony functionality in IP L A N © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 43. environments, it is a long-established and stable protocol very suitable for intervendor compatibility. H.323 is supported by all Cisco voice gateways and CM platforms as well as some third-party video endpoints. MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol is a lightweight client/server protocol for PSTN gateways and some clients. It is simple to configure and allows the call agent to control the M G C P gateway, eliminating the need for expensive gateways with intelligence and complex configurations. The gateway reports events such as a trunk going off-hook, and the call agent instructs the gateway on what to do; the gateway has no local dial plan because all call routing decisions are made at the call agent and relayed to the M G C P gateway. M G C P is not as widely implemented as SIP or H.323. M G C P is not supported by Unified CM Express or the Smart Business Communication System. SIP Session Initiation Protocol is an IETF standard that uses peer-to-peer signaling. It is very similar in structure and syntax to HTTP, and because it is text-based, it is relatively simple to debug and troubleshoot. SIP can use multiple transport layer protocols and can support security and proxy functions. SIP is an evolving standard that currently provides basic telephony functionality; further developments and extensions to the standard will soon make it feature-comparable with SCCP. One of its most important capabilities is creating SIP trunks to IP Telephony service providers, replacing or enhancing traditional T D M PSTN connections. SCCP Skinny Client Control Protocol is a Cisco-proprietary signaling protocol used in a client-server manner between Unified CM and Cisco IP Phones (and some Cisco gateways). SCCP uses TCP connections to the Unified CM to set up, maintain, and tear down voice and video calls. It is referred to as a stimulus protocol, meaning that it sends messages in response to events such as a phone going off-hook or a digit being dialed. SCCP is the default signaling protocol for all Cisco IP phones, although many also support SIP; SIP does not yet support the full feature set available to SCCP phones. All Cisco Unified Communications call agents (CM, CM Express, and the 500 Series) and some gateways support SCCP. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 44. C o n n e c t i n g a VoIP S y s t e m to a S e r v i c e Provider Network A VoIP system that can place calls only to other devices on the IP network is only marginally useful; we still need to place calls out to the PSTN, and to do so we need to connect to a phone service provider, whether via traditional T D M links or ITSP connections. The device that acts as the interface to the PSTN is the voice gateway; it provides the physical connection and logical translation between two or more different network technologies. Understanding Gateways, Voice Ports, and Dial Peers The following sections establish some terms of reference. Gateways In the Cisco Unified Communications architecture, a gateway is typically a voice-enabled router with an appropriate voice port installed and configured. Gateways can have both analog and digital voice port connections, including analog FXO, F X S , and E & M or digital T l / E l or PRI interfaces. Call Legs A call leg is the inbound or outbound call path as it passes through the gateway. As the call comes into the gateway, it is associated with an inbound port. (This is the inbound call leg.) As the call is sent out another gateway port, this creates the outbound call leg. There will be inbound and outbound call legs at each gateway router. Dial Peers A dial peer is a pointer to an endpoint, identified by an address (a pattern of digits). Cisco gateways support two types of dial peers: POTS and VoIP. POTS dial peers are addressed with PSTN phone numbers, and VoIP dial peers are addressed by IP addresses. Dial peers identify the source and destination endpoints of call legs; an inbound call leg is matched to a dial peer, and the outbound call leg is routed to a destination dial peer. Depending on the direction of the call, the dial peers may be POTS inbound and VoIP outbound, vice versa, or possibly both VoIP. It is unlikely but not impossible that the © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 45. inbound and outbound dial peers would both be POTS. Each dial peer also defines attributes such as the codec to use, QoS settings, and other feature settings. Dial peers are configured in the gateway IOS, using either the CLI or GUI interface. The partial output that follows shows a simple POTS dial peer configuration: G a t e w a y ( c o n f i g ) # d i a l - p e e r v o i c e 10 p o t s Gateway(config-dialpeer)#destination-pattern 8675309 Gateway(config-dialpeer)#port 1/0/1 The number assigned to dial peers is arbitrary, although dial peer 0 exists by default and cannot be deleted. The keyword pots creates a POTS dial peer; the keyword voip would create a VoIP dial peer. The destination-pattern command iden- tifies that the attached device (phone or PBX) terminates calls to the specified number (or a range of numbers if connect- ing to a PBX). The port command identifies the physical hardware connection the dial peer will use to reach the destination pattern. The destination-pattern command associates a phone number with a dial peer. The specified pattern can be a specific phone number (as above, 8675309) or an expression that defines a range of numbers. The router uses the patterns to decide which dial peer (and associated physical port) it should route a call to. The following table briefly explains destination-pattern syntax. Character Meaning + The preceding digit is repeated one or more times. * and # NOT wildcards; these are valid DTMF digits. , (comma) Inserts a one-second pause. . (dot) Specifies any one wildcard digit (0 - 9, *, #). The pattern "20." would match all strings from 200 through 209, plus 20*and20#. [] Square brackets define a range, within which any one digit may be matched; for example, "20[4-6]" defines 204, 205, and 206. T Indicates a variable length string; this is useful in cases where local, long-distance, and international PSTN numbers may be called; the destination pattern could men be ".T". This pattern would match any string of up to 32 digits. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 46. C o n n e c t i n g a VoIP S y s t e m to a S e r v i c e P r o v i d e r N e t w o r k Configuring VoIP dial peers is equally simple. Examine the following configuration: G a t e w a y ( c o n f i g ) # d i a l - p e e r voice 20 voip Gateway(config-dialpeer)# destination-pattern 4.... Gateway(config-dialpeer)# session target ipv4:10.1.1.2 In this example, the destination pattern is any four-digit number starting with "4." A new command, session-target, is used to identify the IP (version 4 in this case) address of the gateway or call agent that will terminate the call. If the IP address is on a router, it should be a loopback IP so that the address is always available even if a physical interface fails. The preceding configuration creates an H.323 dial peer (in contrast to a SIP dial-peer). Routers attempt to match dial peers for the inbound call leg according to the following rules: NOTE 1. Look for the incoming called-number command in a dial peer that matches the called number or DNIS string of the The default dial peer 0 inbound leg. cannot be deleted or modified. It does not 2. Look for the answer-address command in a dial peer that matches the calling number or ANI string of the inbound negotiate services such call leg. as VAD, DTMF Relay, or 3. Look for the destination-pattern command in a dial peer that matches the calling number or ANI string of the TCL applications. The dial peer 0 configuration inbound call leg. for inbound VoIP calls 4. Look for the POTS dial peer port command that matches the voice port of the incoming call (POTS dial peers only). contains the following: • Any codec 5. If all of the above fail to match, match against Default Dial Peer 0 as a last resort. • VAD enabled The default dial peer 0 config for inbound POTS calls includes the following: • No RSVP Support • no ivr application • Fax-rate voice When a router is matching the dialed digits against the patterns in the configured dial peers, it attempts to find the longest match. This occurs on a digit-by-digit basis. Each successive digit may validate some patterns while eliminating others until a single pattern represents the longest match between the dialed digits and the destination pattern, at which point the call is routed to the outbound dial peer configured with that matching pattern. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 47. Consider the following configuration: d i a l - p e e r voice 10 voip destination-pattern .T session t a r g e t ipv4:10.10.10.1 i d i a l peer v o i c e 2 0 v o i p destination-pattern 867[2-3]... session t a r g e t ipv4:10.10.20.1 ! d i a l - p e e r voice 30 voip destination-pattern 8674... session t a r g e t i p v 4 : 10.10.30.1 i d i a l - p e e r voice 40 voip d e s t i n a t i o n - p a t t e r n 8675309 session t a r g e t ipv4:10.10.40.1 Given this configuration, the following example dialed numbers illustrate how the patterns match dialed digits: • The dialed number 867-5309 will match dial peer 40 (exact 7-digit match) • The dialed number 867-4309 will match dial peer 30 (first four digits match) • The dialed number 867-3309 will match dial peer 20 (first four digits match) • The dialed number 876-5309 will match dial peer 10 (no other exact match, so the " . T " pattern matches) Internet Telephony Service Providers As VoIP technology matured and stabilized, telephone service providers began extending VoIP connectivity to their customers, allowing for simple, flexible connection alternatives to traditional T D M links. Internet Telephony Service © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 48. Providers (ITSP) connections are typically much less expensive, available in smaller bandwidth increments than Tl or PRI links, and can route nonvoice data traffic concurrently. QoS configuration is supported (and in fact is required for proper VoIP operation). Most ITSP links use SIP, but H.323 is an option. The gateway configuration is relatively simple, with the creation of a VoIP dial peer pointing at the provider with the parameters they supply. PSTN calls are routed to the provider, who then routes calls to their PSTN connection, usually with a toll-minimizing route that dramatically reduces long-distance costs to the customer. Understanding Call Setup and Digit Manipulation Successfully completing a phone call requires that the correct digits are sent to the terminating device, whether on the VoIP network or the PSTN. PSTN calls are typically more complex because of the varying local and international requirements for the number of digits required to route the call. Over and above this basic requirement are the additional complexities imposed by requirements of the business: we may want to change our A N I number, add or strip access codes, compensate for undesirable default behavior, or build specialized functionality for our particular purposes. This section deals with digit manipulation and troubleshooting. Digit Consumption and Forwarding Some strange things happen when an IOS gateway matches a dial peer for an outbound call leg and forwards the dialed digits to the terminating device. For POTS dial peers, the gateway consumes (meaning strips away) the left-justified digits that exactly match the dial-peer destination pattern and forwards only the wildcard-matched digits to the terminating device. Clearly, this could cause problems if the PSTN were to receive only 4 digits, as in this example: d i a l - p e e r voice 20 pots destination-pattern 867.... port 1/0:1 © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 49. With this configuration, if the dialed number was 867-5309, the gateway would forward only 5309 (the wildcard matches), and the PSTN would be unable to route the call. Adding the command no digit-strip in the dial-peer configura- tion will change this behavior and cause the gateway to forward all dialed digits. For VoIP dial peers, the default behavior is to forward all collected digits. Digit Collection The router will collect digits one at a time and attempt to match a destination pattern. As soon as it has an exact match, the call is immediately placed, and no more digits are collected. If there are destination patterns that have overlapping digits, this can cause calls to be misrouted, as in the following example: Dial-peer voice 1 voip D e s t i n a t i o n p a t t e r n 555 Session t a r g e t ipv4:10.1.1.1 ! Dial-peer voice 2 voip D e s t i n a t i o n - p a t t e r n 5552112 Session t a r g e t ipv4:10.2.2.2 If the user dials 555-2112, dial peer 1 will exactly match at the third digit, the call will be immediately routed using dial peer 1, and only the collected digits of 555 will be forwarded. We solve the problem by changing the configuration as shown next: Dial-peer voice 1 voip Destination pattern 5 5 5 . . . . Session t a r g e t ipv4:10.1.1.1 ! Dial-peer voice 2 voip D e s t i n a t i o n - p a t t e r n 5552112 Session t a r g e t ipv4:10.2.2.2 © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 50. Now, when the third digit is entered, the router cannot make an exact match because both dial peers are possible matches; when the last digit is dialed, the router determines that dial peer 2 is an exact match and immediately places the call. Dial peer 1 is also a match, but because of the wildcards, the destination pattern matches 10,000 possible numbers (0000 through 9999); it is not as close a match as dial peer 2. Digit Manipulation Sometimes we need to add, change, or remove digits before the call is placed. We do this to avoid inconveniencing users or to match the dialed digit requirements of a gateway or the PSTN. We have several methods of modifying the digit string, as described in the following sections. prefix The prefix dial-peer command adds digits to the beginning of the string after the outbound dial peer is matched but before passing digits to the destination. An example of its use is a POTS dial peer with 2 . . . as the destination pattern. If the user dials 2112, the default behavior is for the POTS dial peer to forward only 112. Adding the command prefix 6045552 forces the router to prepend the additional digits required to route the call over the PSTN: d i a l - p e e r voice 20 pots destination-pattern 2... prefix 6045552 port 1/0/0 forward-digits forward-digits: This dial-peer command forces the specified number of digits to be forwarded, whether the digits were exact match or wildcard matches, overriding the default behavior of stripping the exact matches. You can specify a number of digits to forward (as shown in the example that follows) or use forward-digits all to force all dialed digits to be forwarded. d i a l - p e e r voice 20 pots destination-pattern 5552... © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 51. forward-digits 7 port 1/0/0 Number Expansion num-exp: The number expansion table is a global command that either expands an extension (perhaps a 4-digit extension into a full 10-digit PSTN number) or completely replaces one number with another. This command is applied before the outbound dial peer is matched, so there must be a configured dial peer that matches the expanded number for the call to be forwarded. num-exp 2 . . . 5552... d i a l - p e e r voice 20 pots destination-pattern 5552... port 1/0/0 Translation Rules voice translation-rule: This global command configures number translation profiles to allow us to alter the ANI, DNIS, or redirect number for a call. Using the command is a three-step process: 1. Define the translation rule globally: voice t r a n s l a t i o n - r u l e 1 rule 1 /555/ /867/ The rule command defines a pattern to match (in this case 555) and a pattern to change the matched digits to (in this case 867). The match and replace patterns are identified and separated by the "/" characters that begin and end the patterns. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 52. 2. Create the voice translation profile containing the translate instruction (the options are [calledlcallingl redirect-calledlredirect-target], and reference the rule we just defined by number. In this example we are translat- ing the called number: v o i c e t r a n s l a t i o n - p r o f i l e JENNY translate called 1 3. Apply the profile to one or more dial peers, either inbound or outbound: d i a l - p e e r voice 20 pots description translated t o Jenny t r a n s l a t i o n - p r o f i l e outgoing JENNY destination-pattern 5552... port 1/0/0 Translation rules use regular expression syntax, which can be quite complex. The following table defines the characters used, and examples follow. Cisco Regular Expression Characters for Voice Translation Rules Character Description Matches any single character. (match) In the match phrase: Escape the special meaning of the next character. (replace) In the replace phrase: Reference a set number from the match phrase. A Match the expression at the beginning of the digit string. $ Match the expression at the end of the digit string. / Identifies the start and end of both the match and replace phrases. [0-9] Match a single character in a list. A [ 0-9] Do not match a single character specified in the list. continues © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 53. Cisco Regular Expression Characters for Voice Translation Rules continued * Repeat the previous expression 0 or more times. + Repeat the previous expression 1 or more times. ? Repeat the previous expression 0 or 1 time. () Identifies a set in the match expression. Example 1: rule 1 /123/ /456/ The first set of forward slashes defines the match phrase; the second set defines the replace phrase. This expression means "match 123 and replace it with 456." Thus: • 123 is replaced with 456 • 6123 is replaced with 6456 • 1234 is replaced with 4564 • 1234123 is replaced with 4564123 (only the first instance of the match is replaced) Example 2: voice t r a n s l a t i o n ? r u l e 1 A rule 1 / 4 0 . . . / /66660B0/ This example replaces any five-digit number that begins with " 4 0 " with the number "6666000". Example 3: voice t r a n s l a t i o n ? r u l e 1 A / (867)(....)/ /5552/ © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 54. This example means: "If the number starts with 867 and is followed by any four other digits, change the 867 to 555 and replace the other four digits with the digits in Set 2 of the match." Remember that the forward slashes define the match and replace phrases; the backslashes mean "the next character is not part of what to match"; the round brackets indicate which sets of characters in the matched number to keep in the replaced number. The sets are numbered starting with 1, so the first set of round brackets is 1, and the second is 2 (as in this example). Private Line Automatic Ringdown (PLAR) PLAR creates a permanent association between a voice port and a destination number (or voice port). When PLAR is configured, going off-hook on that voice port automatically dials the pattern specified by the connection plar <number> command. The caller does not hear a dial tone and does not have to dial a number. Think of PLAR as a hotline; pick up the Batline and you get Batman without having to dial. The following shows a simple P L A R configuration that will call 867-5309 when the phone goes off-hook: voice port 1/0/0 connection p l a r 8675309 Troubleshooting Dial Plans and Dial Peers The following sections discuss some of the commands available to troubleshoot your configuration. show dial-peer voice To display information for voice dial peers, use the show dial-peer voice command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode. show d i a l - p e e r v o i c e [number | summary] © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 55. Syntax Description number (Optional) A specific voice dial peer. Output displays detailed information about that dial peer. summary (Optional) Output displays a short summary of each voice dial peer. If both the name argument and summary keyword are omitted, output displays detailed information about all voice dial peers. The following is sample output from this command for a VoIP dial peer: Router# show d i a l - p e e r v o i c e 101 VoiceOverIpPeer101 peer t y p e = v o i c e , information type = voice, description = '', tag = 6001, destination-pattern = "6001', answer-address = '', preference=0, CLID R e s t r i c t i o n = None 1 CLID Network Number = " CLID Second Number s e n t CLID O v e r r i d e RDNIS = d i s a b l e d , source c a r r i e r - i d = target c a r r i e r - i d = source t r u n k - g r o u p - l a b e l = '', target trunk-group-label = ' ' , numbering Type = "unknown' group = 6 0 0 1 , Admin s t a t e i s u p , O p e r a t i o n s t a t e i s up, i n c o m i n g c a l l e d - number = connections/maximum = 0 / u n l i m i t e d , DTMF Relay = d i s a b l e d , <output omitted> © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 56. The following is sample output from this command with the summary keyword: Router# show d i a l - p e e r v o i c e summary d i a l - p e e r hunt 0 PASS TAG TYPE ADMIN OPER PREFIX DEST-PATTERN PREF THRU SESS TARGET 100 p o t s up up 0 101 v o i p up up 5550112 0 syst ipv4 10.10.1 1 102 v o i p up up 5550134 0 syst ipv4 10.10.1 1 99 v o i p up down 0 syst 33 p o t s up down 0 debug voip dialpeer inout To display information about the voice dial peers, use the debug voip dialpeer command in privileged EXEC mode. Router# debug v o i p d i a l p e e r i n o u t v o i p d i a l p e e r i n o u t debugging i s o n *May 1 19:32:11.731: //-1/6372E2598012/DPM/dpAssociateIncomingPeerCore: Result=Success(0) a f t e r DP_MATCH_INCOMING_DNIS; Incoming D i a l - p e e r = 1 0 0 *May 1 19:32:11.731: //-1/6372E2598012/DPM/dpAssociateIncomingPeerCore: C a l l i n g Number=4085550111, C a l l e d Number=3600, V o i c e - l n t e r f a c e = 0 x 0 , Timeout=TRUE, Peer Encap Type=ENCAP_VOIP, Peer Search Type=PEER_TYPE_VOICE, Peer I n f o Type=DIALPEER_INFO_SPEECH *May 1 19:32:11.731: //-1/6372E2598012/DPM/dpAssociateIncomingPeerCore: Result=Success(0) a f t e r DP_MATCH_INCOMING_DNIS; Incoming D i a l - p e e r = 1 0 0 *May 1 19:32:11.735: //-1/6372E2598012/DPM/dpMatchPeersCore: C a l l i n g Number=, C a l l e d Number=3600, Peer I n f o Type=DIALPEER_INFO_SPEECH © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 57. *May 1 19:32:11.735: //-1/6372E2598012/DPM/dpMatchPeersCore: Match Rule=DP_MATCH_DEST; C a l l e d Number=3600 *May 1 19:32:11.735: //-1/6372E2598012/DPM/dpMatchPeersCore: Result=Success(0) a f t e r DP_MATCH_DEST *May 1 19:32:11.735: //-1/6372E2598012/DPM/dpMatchPeersMoreArg: Result=SUCCESS(0) The following event shows the matched dial peers in the order of priority: List of Matched Outgoing Dial Peer(s): 1: Dial PeerTag=3600 2: Dial Peer Tag=36 Troubleshooting Signaling for POTS Call Legs show controllers t1 The show controllers tl command displays Tl (or E l ) controller status and function. The following is sample output from this command: Router# show c o n t r o l l e r s t1 T1 4 / 1 i s u p . Applique type is Channelized T1 Cablelength is short 133 No a l a r m s d e t e c t e d . Framing i s ESF, L i n e Code i s AMI, Clock Source i s l i n e Data i n c u r r e n t i n t e r v a l (10 seconds e l a p s e d ) : 0 L i n e Code V i o l a t i o n s , 0 Path Code V i o l a t i o n s 0 S l i p Sees, 0 Fr Loss Sees, © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 58. C o n n e c t i n g a VoIP S y s t e m to a S e r v i c e P r o v i d e r N e t w o r k 0 L i n e E r r Sees, 0 Degraded Mins 0 E r r o r e d Sees, 0 B u r s t y E r r Sees, 0 S e v e r e l y E r r Sees, 0 U n a v a i l Sees In this output, no alarms were detected. Possible alarms are as follows: • Transmitter is sending remote alarm. • Transmitter is sending AIS. • Receiver has loss of signal. • Receiver is getting AIS. • Receiver has loss of frame. • Receiver has remote alarm. • Receiver has no alarms. show voice port Use the show voice port command to display configuration and voice-interface-card-specific information about a specific port. The following is sample output for an E & M analog voice port: Router# show v o i c e port 1/0/0 E&M S l o t i s 1 , Sub-unit is 0, Port is 0 Type of V o i c e P o r t is E&M O p e r a t i o n S t a t e is DORMANT A d m i n i s t r a t i v e S t a t e is UP I n i t i a l Time Out i s s e t t o 0 s I n t e r d i g i t Time Out i s s e t t o 0 s © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 59. Analog Info Follows: Region Tone i s s e t f o r n o r t h a m e r i c a Voice card s p e c i f i c Info Follows: S i g n a l Type is wink-start O p e r a t i o n Type i s 2 - w i r e E&M Type is 1 D i a l Type i s dtmf In Seizure is inactive Out S e i z u r e is i n a c t i v e show dialplan number To display which outgoing dial peer is reached when a particular telephone number is dialed, use the show dialplan number command in privileged EXEC mode. Router# show d i a l p l a n number 1001 Macro E x p . : 1001 VoiceEncapPeer1003 i n f o r m a t i o n type = v o i c e , t a g = 1003, destination-pattern = 1001', answer-address = '', preference=0, 1 numbering Type = unknown' group = 1003, Admin s t a t e i s u p , O p e r a t i o n s t a t e i s up, incoming called-number = '', connections/maximum = 0 / u n l i m i t e d , DTMF Relay = d i s a b l e d , huntstop = enabled, type = pots, prefix = ' ' , © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 60. forward-digits default 1 session-target = ' , v o i c e - p o r t = '1/1' debug voip ccapi inout The debug voip ccapi inout c o m m a n d traces the execution path through the call control API, which serves as the inter- face between the call session application and the underlying network-specific software. You can use the output from this c o m m a n d to understand how calls are being handled by the router. This c o m m a n d shows how a call flows through the system. Using this debug level, you can see the call setup and teardown operations performed on both the telephony and network call legs. Router# debug v o i p c c a p i i n o u t v o i p c c a p i i n o u t debugging i s o n NOTE T h e following lines show information about the calling and called numbers. T h e network presentation indicator (NPI) This debug generates a shows the type of transmission. The Incoming Dial-Peer field shows that the incoming dial peer has been matched. very long output, which is impractical to fully *Apr 18 2 0 : 4 2 : 1 9 . 3 4 7 : //-1/9C5A9CA88009/CCAPI/cc_api_call_setup_ind_common: duplicate here. I suggest Interface=0x64F26F10, Call Info( you familiarize yourself Calling Number=4085550111(TON=National, NPI=ISDN, S c r e e n i n g = U s e r , Passed, with sample outputs from Presentation=Allowed), the Cisco IOS Debug Called Number=83103(TON=Unknown, NPI=Unknown), Command Guide or C a l l i n g Translated=FALSE, S u b s r i b e r Type S t r = R e g u l a r L i n e , FinalDestinationFlag=TRUE, better yet from your own Incoming Dial-peer=1, P r o g r e s s I n d i c a t i o n = N U L L ( 0 ) , C a l l i n g I E Present=TRUE, lab experimentation. Source T r k g r p Route L a b e l = , T a r g e t T r k g r p Route L a b e l = , CLID T r a n s p a r e n t = F A L S E ) , C a l l Id=-1 *Apr 18 2 0 : 4 2 : 1 9 . 3 4 7 : //-1/9C5A9CA88009/CCAPI/ccCheckClipClir: I n : C a l l i n g Number=4085550111(TON=National, NPI=ISDN, S c r e e n i n g = U s e r , Passed, Presentation=Allowed) *Apr 18 2 0 : 4 2 : 1 9 . 3 4 7 : //-1/9C5A9CA88009/CCAPI/ccCheckClipClir: Out: C a l l i n g Number=4085550111(TON=National, NPI=ISDN, Screening=User, Passed, Presentation=Allowed) © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 61. Preparing the Infrastructure to Support Unified Communications In this section, the best practices components for preparing the network to properly support Unified Communications are explored. Topics covered include the following: • Voice VLANs • DHCP • NTP • Power over Ethernet • IP Phone firmware and configuration files Voice VLANs VLANs provide a logical separation of Layer 3 traffic and are created at Layer 2 (the network switch). A voice V L A N (VVLAN, also called an Auxiliary VLAN) is an additional V L A N for the exclusive use of VoIP and video traffic. The benefits of using a V V L A N include isolation from the broadcast traffic data VLANs, a measure of additional security, and simpler deployment because you do not have to renumber the IP address scheme of the whole network to add VoIP endpoints. (Each V L A N is a new, separate subnet.) Most Cisco IP Phones are actually 3-port switches. The port that connects to the network switch can act as an 802. lq trunk, allowing both voice and data traffic to be multiplexed in their respective VLANs on the single cable to the network switch. The second port connects the desktop PC to the phone (and thus to the network over the trunk on the first port), and the third port is an internal one for the voice traffic generated and received by the phone. On many Cisco switches, the port connecting the phone does not need to be a trunk; it can be an access port instead. The switch is capable of sending the V V L A N ID using CDP messages, and the phone then sends frames from itself tagged with the learned V V L A N ID and forwards frames from the attached PC untagged. These untagged frames will be tagged with the access V L A N ID configured on the switch port when they are processed by the switch. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 62. The phone adds a QoS marking to its own frames, using the 802. lq frame header Class of Service (CoS) field. The phone marks its frames as CoS 5 by default. This is the recommended setting, but it can be modified. The following is a typical switchport configuration for an attached IP Phone in V V L A N 100 and the PC in V L A N 50: Switch(config)#interface FastEthernet 0/1 S w i t c h ( c o n f i g - i f ) # s w i t c h p o r t mode access S w i t c h ( c o n f i g - i f ) # s w i t c h p o r t access v l a n 5 0 Switch(config-if)#switchport voice vlan 100 Switch(config-if)#spanning-tree portfast DHCP It is recommended that you use D H C P for IP Phone addressing. Create a separate subnet for the Voice V L A N and add the Option 150 parameter to identify the T F T P server IP address. This can be done on an existing D H C P server, or a new one can be added if necessary; Cisco routers have D H C P server capability. The following configuration is a typical example of router-based D H C P to support IP Phones: service dhcp ! e n a b l e s t h e DHCP s e r v i c e I i p dhcp e x c l u d e d - a d d r e s s 1 0 . 1 . 1 . 1 10.1.1.10 ! s p e c i f i e s a s t a r t / e n d range of addresses t h a t DHCP w i l l NOT a s s i g n ip dhcp p o o l name IP_PH0NES ! C r e a t e s a p o o l of a d d r e s s e s ( c a s e - s e n s i t i v e name) and e n t e r s DHCP c o n f i g u r a t i o n mode I network 1 0 . 1 . 1 . 0 2 5 5 . 2 5 5 . 2 5 5 . 0 ! D e f i n e s t h e subnet o f a d d r e s s e s f o r t h e p o o l default-router address 10.1.1.1 ! D e f i n e s t h e d e f a u l t gateway © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 63. d n s - s e r v e r address 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.11 ! i d e n t i f i e s t h e DNS s e r v e r IP a d d r e s s ( e s ) - up to 8 I P ' s ! option 150 i p 192.168.1.2 ! i d e n t i f i e s t h e TFTP s e r v e r IP If you choose to use a D H C P server that resides on a different network, you will need to add the ip helper-address <ip-address> command on the Voice V L A N interface of the router so that it will forward D H C P broadcasts from the phones to the D H C P server. Network Time Protocol Clock synchronization is important in VoIP systems for accurate Call Detail Records (used for billing), easier trou- bleshooting and debugging, and for good voice performance. Network Time Protocol (NTP) is used on all Cisco devices to sync the system clock to a master clock. IP Phones get their time from the call agent (CM, CM Business Edition, CM Express, or SBCS). The call agent(s) are configured to get their time from a master clock, usually a highly accurate atomic or radio clock external to the network. R o u t e r ( c o n f i g ) # c l o c k timezone pst -8 ! S p e c i f i e s t h e l o c a l t i m e z o n e as PST (8 hours b e h i n d GMT) R o u t e r ( c o n f i g ) # c l o c k summer-time zone r e c u r r i n g f i r s t Sunday a p r i l 0 2 : 0 0 l a s t Sunday October 02:00 ! A c t i v a t e s Summer Time change in t h e s p e c i f i e d d a t e range ! Router(config)#ntp server 10.1.2.3 ! I d e n t i f i e s t h e NTP master c l o c k address © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 64. Cisco IP Phone Firmware and XML Configuration Files Cisco IP Phones need the following three separate files to function: • The firmware file: This file is loaded into nonvolatile memory and is persistent across reboots. To make the firmware files available to the phones, use the router command tftp-server flash:firmware-file-name. The command load phone-type firmware-file is also required to associate the model of IP phone with the appropriate firmware file. • SEPAAAABBBBCCCC.cnf.xml: This is the device-specific X M L configuration file ( A A A A B B B B C C C C is the MAC address of the phone), which specifies the IP address, port, firmware, locale, directory URL, and many other pieces of information. This file is created when the IP Phone has been added to the configuration. • XMLDefault.cnf.xml: This is the X M L configuration file that devices use if their specific SEP<MAC> file is not available (typically if they have not registered before or if they have been factory reset). These files are downloaded by the phone during its boot process. Power over Ethernet Power over Ethernet (PoE) is a desirable option because it eliminates the cost and clutter of power bricks for the IP Phones. There are two methods of PoE delivery: • Cisco prestandard (inline power) • 802.3af standard Extra care should be taken to ensure the following: • RJ-45 cabling is tested and meets the required standard. • The IP Phone and the switch have a common PoE delivery method. • The PoE switch has a suitable UPS backup to provide power continuance in the event of a power failure. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 65. Alternatively, each IP Phone may be powered by its own cable and transformer, or a variety of power injectors are avail- able. The Cisco prestandard PoE method works as follows: 1. The switch sends a special tone, called a Fast Link Pulse (FLP), out of the port. The F L P goes to the powered device, in this case an IP phone. 2. When unpowered, the PoE device has a physical link between the pin on which the F L P arrives and a pin that goes back to the switch. This creates a circuit, resulting in the FLP arriving back at the switch. Non-PoE devices will not have this link; the switch will therefore never receive the FLP from a device that does not require PoE. 3. When the switch receives the returning FLP, it applies power to the line. 4. The link comes up within 5 seconds. 5. The powered device (IP phone) boots. 6. Using CDP, the IP Phone tells the switch exactly how much power it needs. (Power requirements vary from device to device.) The 802.3af PoE standard works slightly differently. The standard requires that all eight pins in the RJ-45 cable be present and punched down. The following describes the 802.3af PoE negotiation steps: 1. The switch applies constant DC power to all ports that may require PoE. 2. An 802.3af-compliant device will apply 25 ohms resistance across the DC circuit. 3. The switch detects the resistance and applies low-power PoE to the link. 4. The powered device (the phone) boots. 5. The phone uses C D P to specify its power needs. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 66. Q u a l i t y of S e r v i c e Quality of service (QoS) is possibly the single most important feature to deploy to ensure a successful VoIP system. This section defines and describes why QoS is needed and explains how to configure and deploy a QoS solution using both the Modular QoS Command Line (MQC) and AutoQoS. QoS Definition QoS is defined as The ability of the network to provide better or "special" service to a set of users and applications at the expense of other users and applications. Voice and video traffic is very sensitive to delayed packets, lost packets, and variable delay (jitter). The effects of these problems manifest as choppy audio, missing sounds, echo, or unacceptably long pauses in the conversation that cause overlap, or one talker interrupting the other. QoS configurations provide bandwidth guarantees while minimizing delay and jitter for priority traffic like VoIP. They do so not by creating additional bandwidth, but by controlling how the avail- able bandwidth is used by the different applications and protocols on the network. In effect, this often means that data applications and protocols are restricted from accessing bandwidth when VoIP traffic needs it. This does not have much of an impact on the data traffic, however, because it is generally not as delay or drop-sensitive as VoIP traffic. The areas that QoS can address to improve and guarantee voice quality are the following: • Bandwidth • Delay (including delay variation or jitter) • Packet loss © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 67. Bandwidth A VoIP call follows a single path from end to end. That path may include a variety of L A N and WAN links. The slowest link represents the available bandwidth for the entire path—often referred to as a bottleneck because of the congestion the slow link can cause. If congestion is occurring, there are several ways to fix the problem: • Increase the bandwidth: If bandwidth is unlimited, congestion cannot occur. Realistically, however, increasing bandwidth is costly and is usually unnecessary if QoS is applied instead. • Queuing: QoS employs advanced queuing strategies, which classify different traffic types and organize the classes into queues that are emptied in order of priority. The queuing strategies commonly used in Cisco Unified Communications include the following: • Weighted fair queuing (WFQ): W F Q dynamically assigns bandwidth to traffic flows as they arrive at the router interface. No configuration is necessary; the strategy is enabled by default on router links of Tl speed and below. This strategy is not appropriate for VoIP because it does not provide a bandwidth guarantee for the voice traffic, but instead allocates bandwidth fairly based on flow sizes (hence the name). VoIP needs a Priority queue (PQ) that guarantees it the bandwidth it needs, at the expense of all other traffic. • Class-based weighted fair queuing (CBWFQ): C B W F Q extends the W F Q algorithm to include user-defined classes for traffic. Instead of the router dynamically interpreting traffic flows and building queues for them, the admin classifies the traffic and assigns it to queues of configurable size and bandwidth allocation. There is still no priority queue, however, so C B W F Q is not appropriate for VoIP. • Low-latency queuing (LLQ): L L Q extends the C B W F Q system with the addition of a PQ. The PQ is typically reserved for voice traffic, and if any packets show up in the PQ, all packets in the queue are immediately sent while packets of other traffic types are held in their respective queues. This is the preferred queuing method for VoIP networks. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 68. Compression: Several strategies are available to make the data that needs to be sent smaller so that it consumes less bandwidth: • Payload compression: By compacting the contents of a packet, the total size is somewhat reduced. This compression method does not affect the headers, which makes it appropriate for links that require the header to be readable to route the packet correctly (Frame Relay and ATM as examples). • Link compression: On point-to-point links where the header information is not needed to route the packet, link compression may be used. • Header compression: By specifying the use of compressed RTP (cRTP), the Layer 3 and 4 headers of a VoIP packet are dramatically reduced, from 40 to as little as 2 bytes. T C P header compression is also available for non-VoIP traffic using T C P transport. Compression takes time and CPU resources, adding delay; this must be factored in to the decision of what strategies are appropriate for a given link. Delay Reducing end-to-end delay is a primary goal of QoS. Delay is calculated by adding the cumulative delay totals from source to destination and will be expressed as one-way or round-trip. Delay is classified in the following ways: • Fixed delay is predictable and constant. Sources of fixed delay include the following: • Propagation delay: The amount of time it takes for the signal to transit the link. This is effectively the speed of light as it moves through copper or optical media. Light travels just less than a foot in one-billionth of a second, so long-distance links can impose significant delay that cannot be eliminated. L.A. to New York links routinely see 40 ms one-way propagation delay. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 69. • Serialization delay: This is the time it takes to load bits onto the media; this relates directly to the speed of the link and cannot be altered unless that speed is changed. • Variable delay includes processing and queuing delays; these will vary depending on the traffic load, the router performance, and many other factors that are not easily predictable or constant. Minimizing delay employs the same strategies as improving bandwidth: • Increase link speed. • Use Priority queuing (such as LLQ) for delay-sensitive traffic. • Employ appropriate compression techniques. Packet Loss Ideally, no packets of any type will be lost, but this is not realistic. We do need to minimize packet loss for VoIP traffic because it has no mechanism to retransmit lost packets (unlike TCP, for example). Packets are lost for a variety of reasons: • Tail drop: When an output queue is full, no more arriving packets can be placed in the queue. Any packets that arrive when the queue is full are dropped from the last position (tail) of the queue and cannot be recovered. This is the most common source of packet loss. • Input drop: If the input queue fills up, arriving packets are dropped and lost. This is rare, and it usually indicates an overloaded router CPU. • Overrun: Also the result of CPU congestion, overruns happen when the router cannot assign the packet to a free buffer space. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 70. • Ignore: There is no buffer space available. • Frame errors: Problems in transmission created CRC errors, giant or runt frames. This is usually related to EMI or failing interface hardware. Minimizing loss can be achieved with QoS mechanisms like LLQ and compression or by increasing link speed. Some additional and complementary strategies known as Link Efficiency mechanisms will help to prevent congestion: • Traffic shaping: Delays packets and sends them at a configured maximum rate. For example, if an F T P server is generating a 512 kbps stream, shaping could limit the output to 256 kbps, delaying the transmission of the excess traffic. This will add significant delay and might cause packets to be dropped, so it is not desirable to shape VoIP traffic, but shaping data traffic is an effective tool to complement voice QoS settings. • Traffic policing: Drops packets in excess of a configured threshold. These packets may be retransmitted if the traffic is using TCP, but because VoIP does not, policing should not be applied to VoIP traffic. Again, policing is an effec- tive complement to QoS configurations. QoS Requirements for VoIP There are some accepted targets for delay, loss, and jitter for VoIP traffic. These are the targets that QoS and Link Efficiency mechanisms help us reach: • Delay should be less than 150 ms one way. • Jitter (the variation in the delay between packets) should be less than 30 ms one way. • Packet loss should be less than 1 percent. • Each VoIP call requires between 17 kbps and 106 kbps of priority bandwidth, depending on the codec, compression, and Layer 2 in use; it also requires another 150 bps per call for signaling traffic. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 71. • The requirements for video are similar; bandwidth consumption is calculated as [video codec output] + 20 percent. For example: a typical 384 kbps video stream should be allocated 460 kbps of priority bandwidth. QoS Requirements for Data Traffic Although data requirements are not as strict as those of VoIP, it is appropriate to classify the enterprise data traffic into four or five classes and assign each a certain amount of bandwidth in its particular queue. The Cisco QoS classification tools include Network-Based Application Recognition (NBAR), which makes it simple to classify traffic that would otherwise be difficult or impossible. The classifications you create will compose the QoS policy for the organization. The policy will reflect the actual needs of both voice and data traffic on the network and will be a living document that will adapt to changes in the organization and the applications it uses for business. A QoS policy is developed using the following process: 1. Perform a network audit to determine the current state of traffic on the network. Determine whether congestion prob- lems already exist, and list all applications discovered in current use. 2. Perform a business audit to determine where the applications in use fit into the business model. Some apps will be characterized as critical to the business, some as routine, and some as trivial or perhaps even undesirable. It is not uncommon to discover that the business executive had no idea some apps were in use, and a decision needs to be made about how to treat all applications discovered, legitimate or otherwise. 3. Determine the level of service required for each app. This will range from Priority for voice and video, through Mission Critical, Urgent, Routine and Scavenger, and even Disallowed. The names are not important; the ones used here serve only to identify the relative importance of the apps as they are classified. Every business audit will gener- ate a slightly different picture of what is vital to the business and what is to be disallowed. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 72. 4. Build the classification scheme to match the audit findings. Use the business audit and the executive's decisions to create a classification scheme that lines up with the business needs. 5. Define the QoS settings for each traffic class. This may include a minimum and maximum bandwidth allocation, a priority for each class, queuing strategies, and link efficiency methods, as appropriate. AutoQoS QoS configuration is one of the more advanced skills in the IOS CLI environment. Although it is essentially simple in architecture, the many commands needed are intimidating and time consuming. AutoQoS is a feature available on voice- enabled IOS platforms to greatly simplify and automate QoS configurations. AutoQoS generates traffic classes and service policies using predefined templates, making an in-depth understanding of the commands unnecessary. In any envi- ronment where there is a lack of skill or time, AutoQoS is a benefit. The autogenerated configuration adapts to changes (such as the relocation of an IP Phone) and is manually customizable to meet specific requirements after the automated config is completed. Auto QoS is available on all voice-enabled routers and switches with the correct IOS feature set. Router AutoQoS is limited to the following interfaces: • Serial PPP or H D L C links • Frame Relay point-to-point links only • ATM PVCs, both low- and high-speed QoS Trust Boundary One of the important concepts in QoS is the trust boundary—the point at which the QoS marking of a packet or frame is believed by the switch or router. If it is trusted, the packet is treated according to the QoS marking and corresponding policy. If it is not trusted, it may be re-marked and treated differently. Ideally, we want to place the trust boundary as close to the source (the devices generating the traffic) as possible. This means that the trust boundary should actually be between the IP Phone and the attached PC, because generally we do not © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 73. trust the PC, but we do trust the phone. If there is no phone, the trust boundary is between the switch and the PC. The switch must be able to recognize and configure the trust boundary; if it cannot, we must move the boundary up to the gateway router. AutoQoS can automatically detect and configure the trust boundary by sensing a connected Cisco IP Phone and applying the necessary QoS commands. Configuring AutoQoS The single command auto qos voip [trust] [fr-atm] enables AutoQoS at the interface. The keyword trust causes the DSCP markings of packets to be trusted for classification purposes. If trust is not configured, traffic is classified using NBAR, and the packets are D S C P marked as appropriate. The fr-atm keyword is used on Frame Relay and ATM point- to-point links. The AutoQoS configurations are based on the configured bandwidth of the interface when AutoQoS is first run; lowering the bandwidth after AutoQoS is run will not change the AutoQoS configurations, so AutoQoS must be removed and reapplied if the bandwidth statement is changed. On a switch interface, the keyword [ciscophone] enables the trusted boundary feature when the switch detects a Cisco phone through its CDP messages. When a phone is detected, the QoS marking of packets is trusted; when no phone is detected, the markings are not trusted. Using the [trust] keyword on a switch interface causes the inbound QoS marking of packets to be trusted regardless of whether a phone is detected. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 74. I n t r o d u c i n g Cisco U n i f i e d C o m m u n i c a t i o n s M a n a g e r Express Unified CM Express is a router-based call agent that scales up to 240 phones, depending on platform capacity. The system extends the benefits of Unified Communications to small businesses. Unified CM Express supports a wide range of TP Phone, system, and trunk features, as well as voice-mail integration with Unity, Unity Express, and third-party systems using H.323 or analog D T M F signaling. For a complete feature list, refer to the Unified Communications Manager Express 4.2 Data Sheets on cisco.com. Unified CM Express runs on the ISR platforms, including the 2800 and 3800 series, and on the 3700 series Multiservice Access Routers. The appropriate IOS IP Voice feature set, along with IP Phone licenses and firmware, and flash and R A M appropriate for the install are required. The optional GUI files may be installed for simplified configuration and administration but are not required. Unified CM Express supports all current-generation IP Phones. Defining Ephone and Ephone-DN An ephone is an Ethernet phone, and an ephone-dn is an Ethernet phone directory number. In CM Express, an ephone is a logical configuration and settings for a physical phone, and the ephone-dn is a destination number that can be assigned to multiple ephones. An ephone-dn always has a primary directory number, and it may have a secondary one as well. When you create an ephone-dn, you can specify it as single line (the default) or dual line. A single line can terminate one call; a dual line can terminate two calls at the same time. This is necessary for call waiting, consultative transfer, and conferencing features to work. When you create an ephone-dn, the router automatically creates POTS dial peers to match. The following © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 75. configuration creates a dual-line ephone-dn with a primary and secondary number. The number 20 in the configuration is the tag, which is simply a unique identifier: Router(config)#ephone-dn 20 d u a l - l i n e R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - e p h o n e - d n ) # n u m b e r 5309 secondary 8675309 There is a maximum number of ephone-dns that a given platform will support; this is controlled by the hardware capacity and by licensing. The max-dn <max-dn-value> command must be set to create ephone-dns; the default is zero. Be aware that the router immediately reserves memory for the number of dns you specify, whether they are created or not; you should configure only what you will actually need. An ephone is the logical configuration of a physical phone. Each ephone is given a tag to uniquely identify it. The MAC address of the phone ties it to the ephone configuration. CM Express will detect all phone models except the 7914 sidecar, which must be specified manually. Each different model of IP Phone has a different number of buttons, to which various functions can be applied; the top button is always numbered " 1 , " with the others following in numerical order. The button command allows you to specify which button does what. The following configuration creates a basic ephone for a 7960 with a 7914 sidecar; the button 1:20 command assigns button 1 the dn (5309) assigned to ephone-dn 20 from the previous example: r o u t e r ( c o n f i g ) # ephone 20 r o u t e r ( c o n f i g - e p h o n e ) # mac-address AAAA.BBBB.CCCC r o u t e r ( c o n f i g - e p h o n e ) # t y p e 7960 addon 1 7914 router(config-ephone)# button 1:20 Types of ephone-dns Six types of ephone-dns are configurable in CM Express: • Single line: This ephone-dn creates a single virtual port. Although you can specify a secondary number, the phone can terminate only one call at a time, so it cannot support call waiting. It should be used when there is one phone © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 76. button for each PSTN line that comes into the system. It is useful for things like paging, intercom, call-park slots, M o H feeds, and MWI. Router(config)#ephone-dn 1 Router(config-ephone-dn)#number 1001 • Dual line: The dual-line ephone-dn can support two call terminations at the same time and can have a primary and a secondary number. It should be used when a single button supports call features like call waiting, transfer, and conferencing. It should not be used for lines dedicated to intercom, paging, M o H feeds, MWI, or call park. It can be used in combination with single-line ephone-dns on the same phone. Router(config)#ephone-dn 2 d u a l - l i n e Router(config-ephone-dn)#number 1002 • Dual number: This ephone-dn has a primary and secondary number, making it possible to dial two separate numbers to reach the phone. It can be either a single- or dual-line ephone-dn; it should be used when you want to have two numbers for the same button without using more than one ephone-dn. • Shared ephone-dn: The same ephone-dn and number appears on two separate phones as a shared line, meaning that either phone can use the line, but once in use the other cannot then make calls on that line. The line will ring on all phones that share the ephone-dn, but only one can pick up. If the call is placed on hold, any one of the other phones sharing the line can pick it up. • Multiple ephone-dns on one or more ephones: This configuration allows multiple calls to the same extension to be handled simultaneously on a single phone; for example, using three dual-line ephone-dns with the same number will terminate six calls on the phone. By using multiple ephone-dns on multiple phones, all the phones can answer the same number. This is not a shared line because the phones will ring in succession, and a call on hold can be answered only by the phone that placed it on hold. Controlling the hunting behavior (the order in which buttons or phones ring) is done with the preference and huntstop commands, as explained in the "Hunting Configuration" section that follows. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 77. • Overlay ephone-dn: An overlay consists of two or more ephone-dns (up to 25) applied to the same button; all these ephone-dns must be either single or dual line. (You can't mix the types.) The call coverage is similar to a shared-line setup, except that a call to the number on one phone does not block the use of the same number on another phone. You can overlay up to 10 lines on a single button and then configure the same overlay set on 10 phones, with the result that all 10 phones could answer calls to the same number. The button command with the overlay separator creates the overlay set. The overlay separator can be o, which designates an overlay set without call waiting, or c, which designates call waiting. The command button lo30,31>32,33,34,35 c o n fjg u r e s ephone-dns 30, 3 1 , 32, 33, 34, and 35 on button 1 without call waiting. Hunting Configuration Hunting allows a call to search for an available line to ring. This is commonly used in environments where call coverage is needed to answer the same number, such as a call center or help desk. The preference command sets the order in which the call will be tried on a list of ephone-dns; the huntstop command stops the hunting when it reaches that ephone-dn; from this point, it is typical to send the call to voice mail. The default is huntstop enabled. This can prevent calls from rolling over to the next ephone-dn, so the no huntstop command must be used to allow the desired hunting behavior. If dual-line ephone-dns are configured, the default behavior is for the call to hunt from the first line to the second. This causes the same phone to ring twice for the same call. The following configuration creates an ephone with two ephone-dns that both terminate calls to 1003. The huntstop configuration sends calls to the first channel of ephone-dn 3, then the second channel of ephone-dn 3, then the first channel of ephone-dn 4, then the second channel of ephone-dn 4. Router(config)#ephone-dn 3 d u a l - l i n e Router(config-ephone-dn)#number 1003 Router(config-ephone-dn)#preference 0 Router(config-ephone-dn)#no huntstop © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 78. Router(config)#ephone-dn 4 d u a l - l i n e Router(config-ephone-dn)#number 1003 Router(config-ephone-dn)#preference 1 Router(config-ephone-dn)#huntstop Router(config)#ephone 3 Router(config-ephone)#mac-address AAAA.BBBB.CCCC Router(config-ephone)#button 1:3 2:4 This is not necessarily the behavior we want; it is more common to use the second channel of an ephone-dn for transfer, call waiting, or conferencing. We can force the call to hunt from channel 1 of the first ephone-dn directly to channel 1 of the second ephone-dn instead, using the hunststop channel command. The following configuration will send the call from channel 1 of ephone-dn 5 (on button 2) to channel 1 of ephone-dn 6 (on button 3), then to channel 2 of ephone-dn 6 (also on button 3): Router(config)#ephone-dn 5 d u a l - l i n e Router(config-ephone-dn#number 1004 Router(config-ephone-dn#preference 0 Router(config-ephone-dn#huntstop channel Router(config)#ephone-dn 6 d u a l - l i n e Router(config-ephone-dn#number 1004 Router(config-ephone-dn#preference 1 Router(config-ephone-dn#no huntstop channel Router(config)#ephone 4 Router(config-ephone#mac-address AAAA.BBBB.CCCC Router(config-ephone#button 2:5 3:6 In a call-coverage scenario, we would want the call to hunt to an agent who is not already on the phone. Here we config- ure the call to hunt from channel 1 on the first phone to channel 1 on the second phone: Router(config)#ephone-dn 5 d u a l - l i n e Router(config-ephone-dn#number 1004 © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 79. Router(config-ephone-dn#preference 0 Router(config-ephone-dn#huntstop channel Router(config)#ephone-dn 6 d u a l - l i n e Router(config-ephone-dn#number 1004 Router(config-ephone-dn#preference 1 Router(config-ephone-dn#huntstop channel Router(config)#ephone 4 Router(config-ephone#mac-address AAAA.BBBB.CCCC Router(config-ephone#button 2:5 Router(config)#ephone 5 Router(config-ephone#mac-address DDDD.EEEE.FFFF Router(config-ephone#button 2:6 © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 80. C o n f i g u r i n g C M Express t o S u p p o r t Endpoints In this section we explore three methods of configuring endpoints on a CM Express system: configuring optional settings, rebooting IP Phones, and troubleshooting and verifying the configuration. Providing Firmware IP Phone firmware files ship with the CM Express software or can be downloaded from cisco.com. For the router to serve the firmware to the phones, the tftp-server fiashifilename command is used. You must enter this command for every firmware file needed. Some phones require more than one file to be loaded—for example, the 791 IG requires six separate files. Telephony Service Configuration Manual setup of the CM Express system is done using the CLI. From the global config, the command telephony-service enables config-telephony mode. This prompt is where your first steps of defining the max-ephones and max-ephone-dn settings (described earlier) would take place. Phone Firmware Loads The firmware files that were copied into Flash and made available to the phones via T F T P must be associated with the phones; this is done using the load model firmware-file command. Filenames are case sensitive, and the file extension should not be included in the command. (Tip: Use the Cut-and-Paste function of your terminal client to prevent annoying typos!) For Java-based phones, it is only necessary to load the TERMnn.x-y-x-w.loads or SCCPnn.x-y-x-w.loads firmware filename (without the .loads extension), although the other files must be available via TFTP. The following is a sample command set: l o a d 7960-7940 P00303020214 l o a d 7920 c m t e r m _ 7 9 2 0 . 4 . 0 - 0 1 - 0 8 l o a d 7941 TERM41.7-0-3-0S © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 81. Defining Source IP and Port The CM Express software uses SCCP to communicate with the phones. (SIP signaling is also possible but is not covered in this document.) The command ip source-address ip-address [port port] defines the IP address of the router that will be used as the source for SCCP messages. The default SCCP TCP port is 2000 and does not normally need to be changed, but the option is available if the situation should require it. Autoregistration The autoregistration function is enabled by default; this allows a phone to be discovered and registered to an available ephone slot (provided the ip source-address command is configured). The command no auto-reg-ephone prevents a phone from registering unless its MAC address is explicitly configured already. CM Express records the MACs of all phones that attempt to register but are blocked by autoregistration being disabled; use the show ephone attempted-registrations command to see the list and the clear telephony-service ephone attempted-registrations command to see and clear the list. Create XML Config Files The create cnf-files command takes the configurations (including the firmware load, the source IP address, and port we just defined) and builds an X M L config file for each phone. This is a necessary step, and one that you may repeat from time to time, for example, if you upgrade firmware or make other changes to the phone configuration. DID Configurations It is common to have a range of DID numbers (fully qualified E.164 numbers) that allow outside callers to reach internal extensions directly; usually, the DIDs have the four-digit internal extension as the last four digits. CM Express supports this configuration with the dialplan-pattern command. This function expands extension numbers to full E.164 numbers and converts incoming E.164 numbers to local extensions. The command is also needed to register the range of numbers the command specifies with a gatekeeper; in fact, once configured, the range is automatically registered if a gatekeeper is configured. You can disable this with the no-reg keyword. The full syntax is dialplan-pattern tag pattern © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 82. extension-length length e x t e n s i o n - p a t t e r n pattern [no-reg]. The pattern uses the same wildcards as dial peers. A sample configuration to set up a dial plan pattern for extensions 5300-5399 and expand them to the DID range of 867-555-5300-867-555-5399 would look like this: telephony-service dialplan-pattern 1 86755553.. e x t e n s i o n - l e n g t h 4 extension p a t t e r n 5 3 . . Automated Deployment of Endpoints In some cases, it is desirable to automate the deployment of phones. The telephony-service auto-assign command will dynamically create ephones as physical phones are connected to the system, assigning an available ephone-dn to the ephone. The ephone-dns must all be the same type (that is, single line or dual line). You must have a range of ephone-dns configured, but it is no longer necessary to create each ephone and associate it manually. The auto assign start-dn to stop-dn [type phone-type] [cfw number timeout seconds] command syntax specifies the range of ephone-dns to use for a given phone model, the Call Forward Busy number to use (typically the voice-mail port), and timeout values. You can enter multiple commands to specify ranges for your different phone types; if no phone type is specified, any phone that registers will be assigned an ephone-dn from the specified range. The 7914 sidecar is not supported by this command; phones with this add-on must have it manually added. The auto-assign cannot be used for ephone-dns that serve paging, MoH, intercom or M W I functions. Nor can it be used for shared-line implementations. Changes must be performed manually at the CLI, followed by resetting the affected phones. The following is a sample of how the command can be used: telephony-service a u t o a s s i g n 11 to 20 t y p e 7920 a u t o a s s i g n 21 to 30 t y p e 7940 a u t o a s s i g n 31 to 40 t y p e 7960 a u t o a s s i g n 41 to 50 ephone-dn 1 d u a l - l i n e number 5301 © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 83. The preceding output assigns ephone-dns from 11 to 20 to 7920s, 21 to 30 to 7940s, 31 to 40 to 7960s, and 41 to 50 to any other type of phone (including those already specified, if there are no more ephone-dns in their range). Location Customization CM Express supports phone display language, time display, and ring cadence localization. The user-locale language- code command will change the language displayed on all 7940 and 7960 phones; the 7920 is not affected and must be configured with its individual language capability local to the phone. The network-locale language-code command will change the call progress tones and ring cadence (again with the exception of the 7920). Following are language codes supported for User Locale: • DE: Germany • DK: Denmark • ES: Spain • FR: France • IT: Italy • NL: Netherlands • NO: Norway • PT: Portugal • RU: Russian Federation • SE: Sweden • US: United States (default) • JA:Japan © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 84. Following are language codes supported for Network Locale: • AT: Austria • CA: Canada • CH: Switzerland • DE: Germany • DK: Denmark • ES: Spain • FR: France • GB: United Kingdom • IT: Italy • JA: Japan • NL: Netherlands • NO: Norway • PT: Portugal • RU: Russian Federation • SE: Sweden • US: United States (default) To change the time display format, use the time-format {12 I 24} command. To change the date format, use date-format {mm-dd-yy I dd-mm-yy I yy-dd-mm I yy-mm-dd}. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 85. Rebooting IP Phones There are two commands available to reboot IP Phones, each with a slightly different behavior. The reset command causes a hard reboot of the phone and invokes D H C P and TFTP. Use reset when changing firmware, user/network locales, or URLs. The reset command can be executed to reset a single phone at the config-ephone prompt, or at the config-telephony prompt to reset one or more phones. The full syntax is reset {all [time-interval] I cancel I mac-address Isequence-all}. The command options work as follows: • all: Resets all phones. • time-interval: Changes the interval between the router resetting the phones in sequence (default = 15sec). • cancel: Stops the reset process. • mac-address: Resets a specific phone. • sequence-all: The router waits for one phone to reset and reregister before resetting the next phone to prevent the phones from overloading the T F T P server. This can be time consuming; the router waits 4 minutes as a timeout before resetting the next phone, whether or not the reregistration of the previous has finished. The restart command causes a soft (warm) reboot and is useful for minor configuration changes, such as buttons, lines, and speed-dial modifications. This command can also be executed either at the config-ephone prompt or at the config- telephony prompt. The syntax is restart {all [time-interval] I mac-address}, with the command parameters the same as the reset command. Troubleshooting Endpoints Check the following when troubleshooting: • Verify IP addressing: Use the Settings button on the phone to check the configuration of the IP phone. The TFTP Server IP should be the CM Express router. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 86. • Verify the files in flash memory: Verify that the correct firmware files are in the flash memory of the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Express router using the show flash command. • Debug the T F T P server: Use debug tftp events to ensure that the Cisco Unified Communications Manager Express router is correctly providing the firmware and X M L files. • Verify the firmware installation of the phones: Use the debug ephone register command to verify which firmware is being installed. • Verify that the locale is correct: Use the show telephony-service tftp-bindings command to view the files that the TFTP server is providing. • Verify the phone setup: Use the show ephone command to view the status of the ephones and whether they are registered correctly. • Review the configuration: Use the show running-config command to verify the ephone-dn configuration. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 87. I m p l e m e n t i n g Basic V o i c e F e a t u r e s A business phone system is expected to provide the following features: • Music on Hold • Call Forward • Call Transfer • Call Park • Intercom • Paging • Call Pickup • Call Blocking • Directory Services The next sections describe the configuration of these basic business telephony features in CM Express. Music on Hold No one likes to be on hold, but having something to listen to makes it a little better and can even relay useful information to the listener. Configuring Music on Hold (MOH) in CM Express is simple. First copy a .wav file to Flash (avoiding copyright issues by using royalty-free recordings). Next, issue the command moh wavefilename.wav in config-telephony mode. By default, the router will multicast the stream to 239.23.4.10:2000; if you need to change this default multicast address (typically you do not), issue the command multicast m o h ip-address port port-number. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 88. Call Forward The user can configure call-forwarding of all calls using the phone softkey. Using the CLI, you can configure different call-forwarding options at the config-ephone-dn prompt: • call-forward all directory-number: Forwards all calls to the specified directory number. • call-forward busy directory-number: Forwards calls to the specified number if the user is on the phone. • call-forward noan directory-number timeout seconds: Forwards calls to the specified directory number if the user does not answer the phone before the specified timeout. • call-forward maxlength length: Restricts the number of digits specified for the call-forwarding number; this prevents call forwarding to an international long-distance number, for example. Call Transfer Users can transfer calls with the Transfer softkey; the administrator can configure how this transfer happens using the transfer-system {blind I full-blind I full-consult llocal-consult} config-telephony command. The command options are as follows: • Blind: Calls are transferred immediately using a Cisco-proprietary method. • Full-blind: Calls are transferred immediately using the H.450.2 standard. • Full-consult: Calls are transferred with consultation (meaning the user must speak to the target of the transfer before the call is released); uses the H.450.2 standard. • Local-consult: Uses a proprietary transfer method; not commonly used. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 89. Call Park Call park allows a user to hold a call but retrieve it from another location by dialing the call park extension. A call-park extension is a "floating" ephone-dn that is not assigned to any ephone. Multiple calls can be parked at a single extension and are retrieved by dialling the extension; calls are picked up in the order in which they were parked. The syntax is rela- tively complex and specifies several options: • park-slot [reserved-for extension-number] [timeout seconds limit count] [notify extension-number [only]] [recall] [transfer extension-number][alternate extension-number][retry seconds limit count]. • reserved-for: (Optional) Indicates that this slot is a private park slot for the phone with the specified extension number as its primary line. All lines on that phone can use this park slot. • timeout seconds: (Optional) Sets the Call Park reminder timeout interval, in seconds. The range is from 0 to 65535. When the interval expires, the Call Park reminder sends a 1-second ring and displays a message on the L C D panel of the Cisco IP Phone that parked the call and to any extension that is specified with the notify keyword. By default, the reminder ring is sent only to the phone that parked the call. If the timeout keyword is not used, no reminder ring is sent to the extension that parked the call. • limit count: (Optional) Sets a limit for the number of reminder timeouts and reminder rings for a parked call. For example, a limit of 10 sends 10 reminder rings to the phone at intervals that are specified by the timeout keyword. When a limit is set, a call parked at this slot is disconnected after the limit has been reached. The limit range is from 1 to 65535 reminders. • notify extension-number: (Optional) Sends a reminder ring to the specified extension in addition to the reminder ring that is sent to the phone that parked the call. • only: (Optional) Sends a reminder ring only to the extension that is specified with the notify keyword and does not send a reminder ring to the phone that parked the call. This option allows all reminder rings for parked calls to be sent to the phone of a receptionist or an attendant, for example. • recall: (Optional) Returns the call to the phone that parked it after the timeout limits expire. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 90. • transfer: (Optional) Returns the call to the specified number after the timeout limits expire. • alternate: (Optional) Returns the call to a specified second target number if the recall or transfer target phone is in use on any of its extensions (ringing or in conversation). • retry seconds: (Optional) Sets the delay before another attempt to recall or transfer a parked call, in seconds. The range is from 0 to 65535. The number of attempts is set by the limit keyword. The following example creates four call-park slots. Ephone-dn 10 and 11 can be used by any extension. A call parked in these slots will stay parked for 100 seconds and will send a notification every 10 seconds to the extension that parked it. If the 100-second limit elapses, the parked call is automatically transferred to 5309; if 5309 is busy or does not answer, it goes to 5310. Ephone-dn 12 and 13 are reserved for 5301 and 5302, respectively. After a call has been parked for 100 seconds, it will be disconnected. ephone-dn 10 number 7000 p a r k - s l o t t i m e o u t 1 0 l i m i t 1 0 t r a n s f e r 5309 a l t e r n a t e 5310 ephone-dn 11 number 7001 p a r k - s l o t t i m e o u t 1 0 l i m i t 1 0 t r a n s f e r 5309 a l t e r n a t e 5310 ephone-dn 12 number 7002 p a r k - s l o t t i m e o u t 1 0 l i m i t 1 0 r e s e r v e d - f o r 5301 ephone-dn 13 number 7003 p a r k - s l o t t i m e o u t 1 0 l i m i t 1 0 r e s e r v e d - f o r 5302 © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 91. Intercom An intercom is a one-way audio speed-dial. Commonly used by an executive to an admin assistant, it allows the user to press a phone button and be directly connected to another user. The destination phone answers the call in muted speaker- phone mode so that privacy is maintained. Any user could dial the intercom if the extension is known. To make it impos- sible for anyone to dial the intercom (except those phones configured to do so), the extension number of the intercom can include the A, B, C, or D character. These characters were at one time part of the touchtone dialpad, but because they are no longer on the phone itself, users cannot dial them; it is still possible to configure them in an ephone-dn, however. The following configuration shows a typical intercom configuration, using the B digit as part of the intercom extension number: ephone-dn 10 number 5301 name "Tommy TuTone" ephone-dn 20 number 5309 name "Jenny" ephone-dn 51 number B5555 name "Tommy TuTone" i n t e r c o m B5556 l a b e l "Tommy TuTone" ephone-dn 52 number B5556 name "Jenny" i n t e r c o m B5555 l a b e l "Jenny" ephone 6 button 1:10 2:51 ephone 7 button 1:20 2 : 5 2 © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 92. Paging Audio paging builds a one-way audio path from the speaker to a single phone, a group of phones, or combined groups of phones. A paging group is created by configuring a dummy ephone-dn with the paging command and associating that ephone-dn with one or more ephones using the paging-dn command. When a user dials the paging extension, all config- ured phones answer the call in muted speakerphone mode. The default transport is unicast, which limits paging to a maximum of 10 targets; multicast is also supported. The command syntax to create the ephone-dn is the following: Router(config-ephone-dn)# paging [ip multicast-address port udp-port] The following shows the syntax for associating an ephone to the paging ephone-dn. Note the unicast keyword, which will override the multicast configuration if the phone is not reachable by multicast: Router(config-ephone)# paging-dn paging-dn-tag [unicast] The following example sets up a single paging group: ephone-dn 25 number 2525 name Paging S h i p p i n g p a g i n g i p 2 3 9 . 0 . 1 . 2 5 p o r t 2000 ephone-dn 18 number 1818 ephone-dn 15 number 1515 ephone 1 mac-address AAAA.BBBB.CCCC button 1:18 p a g i n g - d n 25 ephone 2 © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 93. mac-address BBBB.CCCC.DDDD button 1:15 p a g i n g - d n 25 Combining Paging Groups The config-ephone-dn command paging-grouppaging-dn-tag, paging-dn-tag,... is used to create a combined paging group from multiple, previously defined paging dns. This is useful to create a paging group that reaches all phones for emergency use, or simply to combine other groups for paging. Call Pickup There are three variations of call pickup: • Directed call pickup: Any extension can pick up a call that is on hold on another directory number, without belong- ing to a pickup group. • Group pickup: A user can pick up a call for another group if the user knows the group extension. If only one pickup group is defined, users need only press the Pickup softkey, whether or not they are a member of a pickup group. • Local group pickup: Users can pick up a ringing extension in their own group using the Pickup softkey plus the star key (*). An ephone-dn is assigned to a pickup group with the command pickup-group number. The numbers are arbitrary, but the leading characters must be unique to each group; for example, the group numbers 81 and 817 will both be interpreted If the ringing extension is in the user's group, pressing the Pickup softkey will redirect the call to the user's phone. If the ringing extension is in another group, the user must press the GPickup softkey and enter the group number of the ringing extension. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 94. Call Blocking Call blocking prevents unauthorized use of phones, typically to specific number patterns or times of day. You can define up to 32 patterns of digits to block and apply a time schedule to restrict calls to whatever schedule suits your needs. Call blocking applies to all IP Phones (except analog FXS phones), but phones can be exempted from call blocking individu- ally. An override function exists, configurable with a PIN for authorized users. The schedule can be configured by day or by date using the following config-telephony commands: a f t e r - h o u r s day day start-time stop-time a f t e r - h o u r s d a t e month d a t e s t a r t - t i m e s t o p - t i m e When the after-hours schedule is in place, use the block command to activate call blocking: after-hours block pattern t a g pattern [7-24] The patterns use the same syntax as dial plan patterns. Using the 7-24 keyword blocks the configured pattern 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, and disables the override PIN functionality. The following configuration sets up a call blocking plan for all calls outside of normal business hours of 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Sunday, and the holidays for New Year's day, the Fourth of July, and Christmas day: Router(config)#telephony- service R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - t e l e p h o n y ) # a f t e r - h o u r s day mon 1 7 : 0 0 0 8 : 0 0 R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - t e l e p h o n y ) # a f t e r - h o u r s day t u e 17:00 08:00 R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - t e l e p h o n y ) # a f t e r - h o u r s day wed 1 7 : 0 0 0 8 : 0 0 R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - t e l e p h o n y ) # a f t e r - h o u r s day t h u 17:00 08:00 R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - t e l e p h o n y ) # a f t e r - h o u r s day f r i 17:00 08:00 R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - t e l e p h o n y ) # a f t e r - h o u r s day sat 17:00 08:00 R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - t e l e p h o n y ) # a f t e r - h o u r s day sun 17:00 08:00 R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - t e l e p h o n y ) # a f t e r - h o u r s date jan 1 00:00 00:00 R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - t e l e p h o n y ) # a f t e r - h o u r s date j u l 4 00:00 00:00 © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 95. R o u t e r ( c o n f i g - t e l e p h o n y ) # a f t e r - h o u r s d a t e dec 25 0 0 : 0 0 0 0 : 0 0 Router(config-telephony)#after-hours block pattern 9011! Router(config-telephony)#after-hours block pattern 9011!# Router(config-telephony)#after-hours block pattern 91[2-9]..[2-9] Router(config-telephony)#after-hours block pattern 91900 Router(config-telephony)#after-hours block pattern 91976 Router(config-telephony)#after-hours block pattern 9[2-9]..[2-9] Exempting a phone from after-hours blocking is easily configured with the after-hours exempt command at the config- ephone prompt. Adding a PIN is equally simple at the same prompt with pin pin-number. Directory Services Users can access the list of numbers and names by pressing the Directory key. Directory entries are drawn from the ephone-dn configuration if it includes a name entry. CM Express supports 100 directory entries of up to 32 characters, with the name being up to 24 characters. The directory entries can be listed as first-name-first or last-name-first; whichever method is chosen, the name under the ephone-dn configuration should match to avoid confusion. The config- telephony command to specify how names in the directory shall be displayed is the following: directory {first-name-first | last-name-first} It is possible to configure a directory entry that is not an IP Phone. To create such an entry, use the following config- telephony command: d i r e c t o r y e n t r y { [ e n t r y - t a g number name name] | clear} © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 96. M a i n t a i n i n g a CM Express S y s t e m An IP Phone system needs regular attention to watch for unusual events or unhealthy trends. Day-to-day operations and maintenance tasks include the following: • Updating files on the router • Configuring syslog logging • Billing procedures • Managing Call Detail Records (CDRs) The next sections discuss these topics and configurations. Managing Router Files The CM Express router will need routine updates applied to improve reliability, add features, or enhance security. Whether the files are upgrades to the Cisco IOS, the Communication Manager Express application or GUI, phone firmware or M O H files, the command to load them into the router is the familiar copy tftp flash syntax. (The TFTP server must be active and accessible over the network, of course.) FTP is also supported if file sizes greater than 32 MB are to be moved; a suitable account and password must be configured for F T P transfers. CM Express software is available as a bundled, single .zip file containing all the files needed to run CM Express, includ- ing the GUI. This single file can be extracted on the TFTP/FTP server and the files downloaded to the router Flash memory. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 97. SYSLOG and SNMP MIB Support CM Express supports type 6 Syslog messages for IP Phone registration. After a Syslog server is configured using the logging ip_address command and is available on the network, these messages can be viewed along with other messages generated by the router, using the Syslog viewer of your choice. The following are the Syslog messages provided for IP Phone registration events: • %IPPHONE-6-REG_ALARM • %IPPHONE-6-REGISTER • %IPPHONE-6-REGISTER_NEW • %IPPHONE-6-UNREGISTER_ABNORMAL • %IPPHONE-6-UNREGISTER_NORMAL S N M P allows network system administrators to monitor changes and events by way of messages sent to a monitoring application. CM Express support for S N M P MIBs specific to IP telephony activities and events includes the following three MIBs: • Cisco-DIAL-CONTROL-MIB (CDR and call history) • Cisco-VOICE-CONTROL-MIB (extends to telephony and VoIP dial peers and call legs) • Cisco-VOICE-IF-MIB These MIBs, along with CDR data, allow visibility into detailed information about both summary and specific call infor- mation. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 98. Billing Support Billing support is provided by way of CDR records and H.323 start/stop time A A A messages to the syslog server or billing application. If the user enters an account code using the Acct softkey during call setup or when the call is connected, the account code is recorded in the C D R and added to the Cisco-VOICE-DIAL-CONTROL-MIB. The account code can then be accessed by a billing application to determine how long a user was on the phone with each customer, and billed accordingly. Call Detail Records Call Detail Records (CDR) are created by default and recorded in memory for later review and analysis using either the CLI or GUI. CDRs can optionally be sent to the Syslog server. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 99. I m p l e m e n t i n g Cisco U n i t y Express Unity Express is a richly featured voice-mail and auto-attendant application that is coresident in the router in either a Network Module format or Advanced Integration Module format. Having a local voice-mail application is ideal for smaller organizations as a standalone solution or to provide local voice-mail access in a branch office of a larger organi- zation without having to send the traffic across the IP WAN if bandwidth utilization is an issue. Cisco Unity Express supports up to 250 mailboxes (and 300 users), dependent on hardware platform. It can provide voice-mail and integrated messaging, but not Unified Messaging. There is no provision for a T D M interface to a legacy PBX voice-mail system (because the hardware is internal to the router), and there is no provision for redundancy. Unity Express is actually an embedded Linux operating system, with an Ethernet interface to the router platform. (This interface is not visible physically or in the router configuration.) The following table summarizes the capacities of the three Unity Express hardware platforms. Unity Express Hardware Capacities Cisco Unity Express Module Max. Mailboxes Max. Sessions Internal Card Storage Device Hours of Storage CUE—AIM 50 4 or 6 Yes Flash 14 CUE—NM 100 8 No HDD 300 CUE—NM-Enhanced 250 16 No HDD 300 Unity Express includes both a GUI and TUI interface, for initial mailbox setup as well as ongoing maintenance. The TUI includes a tutorial to make it simple for users to set up their own mailboxes (or General Delivery boxes for group accessi- ble mailboxes), eliminating much of the administrative overhead. Some of the features offered by Unity Express include the following: • Alternate greetings—Allows a user to add a special greeting for an extended absence • Message tagging (private or urgent) © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 100. Reply, forward, or save messages • Pause, fast-forward, or rewind messages during playback • Envelope information • 0-to-Operator with definable destination extension for Operator • Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) • Mailbox Full notification • VPIM compatibility for message interchange with other Unity Express systems (or any other VPIM-compliant system) Unity Express Auto Attendant An Auto Attendant is essentially an interactive answering machine. It answers incoming calls, but it goes beyond that by listening to the callers' responses to questions or options and offering more choices or playing specific greetings. If you have ever heard "Press 1 for English; Appuyez sur le 2 pour Francais," you have heard an Auto Attendant. In addition, Auto Attendant allows callers to search for the number of the person they are calling by first or last name, and Time-of- Day and Day-of-Week call routing, so that different greetings are played when the business is closed. For many busi- nesses, Auto Attendant can eliminate the need for a receptionist—or at least free the person up to do other tasks. An Auto Attendant is a logical mapping of greetings, options, and responses. Creating one requires careful mapping of the decision and response tree. The Cisco Unity Express Editor is a tool that aids and speeds this process. Using the tool, administrators can create multiple customized Auto Attendant flows. Using familiar Windows GUI-based actions, admin- istrators can drag-and-drop steps into the AA tree. Unity Express can run multiple AA scripts at the same time, providing for very flexible and detailed responses to customer calls. If the Unity Express Editor GUI tool is not available and changes need to be made, a TUI interface is also available. This can be very useful, for instance, if the administrator © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 101. wakes up to a foot of new snow and has to call in to the system from home to record an emergency greeting that explains that the business is closed that day because of the snowfall. Users also have access to a TUI that allows them to change their personal mailbox greetings and set or record their alternate greetings. Unity Express GUI Much of the administration of UE can be managed from the administrative GUI. This includes normal operation such as setting passwords and PINs for users, setting up mailboxes, creating users and groups, setting up backup and restore oper- ations, and restarting the system. To use the GUI, open the Unity Express U R L at http://module_ip_address from a supported browser. A command-line interface is also available for initializing the system and for times when the GUI is not available. Certain tasks must be executed through the CLI. These include software installation, upgrade and licensing, monitoring system resources (CPU, memory), and troubleshooting tasks such as viewing Syslog and trace files. Currently only English language support is offered for both GUI and CLI, although other languages are supported for the TUI and Auto Attendant. CUE provides the capability to bulk import users from Communications Manager Express at the command line or by using the GUI. Unity Express Software Files Unity Express comes preloaded with software from the factory; however, if you must reload the software or perform upgrades, both a TFTP and an FTP server are required. The TFTP server must hold the following files: • cue-installer.nm-aim.3.1.1: This is the installer file for version 3.1.1. (Other versions will have appropriate file- names.) • A license file: Various license files can be loaded, each allowing a specific number of mailboxes. The filenames include the number of licenses the file provides; for example, cue-vm-license_25mbx_cme_3.1.1.pkg provides 25 licenses. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 102. The FTP server must hold the following files: • cue-vm.3.1.1.pkg: This is one of two system software files. • cue-vm-full-k9.nm-aim.3.1.1.prtl: This is the second system software file. • cue-vm-installer-k9.nm-aim.3.1.1.prtl: This is the application installation utility • A language file: For example, cue-vm-en_US-lang-pack.nm-aim.3.1.1.prtl. Router Configuration Prerequisites Unity Express can be coresident in the CM Express router, or it can be installed in a different router. In either case, some basic configurations must be applied to the host router: • Routing: Regardless of which routing protocol is in use, the CUE router must be able to reach all networks that include hosts it must contact (voice-mail users, call agents, and so on). • IP addressing: In addition to any interfaces that require IP addresses for network connectivity, the C U E module itself requires addressing to enable the "hidden" Ethernet link across the backplane. The recommendation is to set it up as follows: i n t e r f a c e Loopback 0 i p address 1 9 2 . 1 6 8 . 6 6 . 1 255.255.255.0 ! Defines a software i n t e r f a c e i interface Service-Enginel/0 ! T h i s is t h e CUE module p h y s i c a l i n t e r f a c e I ip unnumbered Loopback 0 © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 103. ! C o n f i g u r e s t h e module t o use t h e s o f t w a r e i n t e r f a c e I P i service-module ip address 192.168.66.2 255.255.255.0 ! D e f i n e s t h e IP of t h e CUE o p e r a t i n g system I service-module ip default-gateway 192.168.66.1 ip route 192.168.66.2 255.255.255.255 service-engine 1/0 ! C o n f i g u r e s r o u t i n g f o r t h e CUE system t o reach t h e r o u t e r and t h e r e s t o f t h e ! network. The Service-Engine and the Service-Module must be on the same subnet; they are the two hosts in a dedicated, "hidden" Ethernet link that exists only on the backplane between the C U E hardware and the software running on it. The router sees the CUE module as a separate host, even though it is physically internal to the router. • Create a SIP dial peer pointing at the C U E service-module. C M E uses SIP to communicate with the C U E system, so a SIP dial peer with the following specific configurations must be created, even if there are no other SIP connections in the CM system: d i a l - p e e r voice 7000 v o i p ! C r e a t e s t h e v o i p d i a l peer destination-pattern 77.. ! Defines the d i g i t p a t t e r n of the mailboxes session protocol sipv2 ! Sets SIP as t h e p r o t o c o l used to communicate w i t h t h e CUE d i a l peer session target ipv4:192.168.66.2 ! I d e n t i f i e s t h e IP a d d r e s s of t h e CUE s e r v i c e - e n g i n e dtmf-relay sip-notify ! Forces DTMF d i g i t s to be s e n t o u t - o f - b a n d as SIP NOTIFY messages i n s t e a d of i n - b a n d codec g711ulaw © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 104. [ 104] ! S e t s t h e codec to G . 7 1 1 , w h i c h is t h e o n l y codec CUE s u p p o r t s no vad ! I t i s recommended t o d i s a b l e VAD f o r t h e CUE system d i a l p e e r . • Configure ephone-dns for M W I on and off functionality. There are some unique characteristics of these specialized DNs: the digit patterns should be unique in the system, of course, but in addition a pattern of dots must follow the digits, and that number of dots must equal the number of digits used in the local dial plan. This means that if you use four digits for the local dial plan, there must be four dots; if a five-digit plan is used, there must be five, and so on. (All extensions in the local dial plan must use the same number of digits.) The resulting configuration will look something like this: ephone-dn 75 number 4 4 7 5 . . . . mwi on ephone-dn 76 number 4 4 7 6 . . . . mwi o f f • Router H T T P access must be configured to support using the web-based GUI administration interface for both CUE and CME. (The GUI for C M E is not covered in this document.) The following commands will enable the HTTP server, define the path to the HTTP files, and configure authentication: • Router(config)# ip http server: Enables the web server (it is disabled by default) • Router(config)#ip http path flash: Sets the path to the http files as the root of the Flash directory • Router(config)#ip http authentication {aaalenablellocalltacacs}: Sets the authentication type used when logging on to the web interface It is possible—and typically recommended—to define a Unity Express web interface administrator that is separate from the router administrator. Often the router admin and the C U E system admin are not the same person, and the C U E admin © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 105. may not have the skills to administer the router. To prevent the CUE admin from inadvertently causing unwanted changes to the router config, create a separate C U E web interface admin using the following command at the config-telephony- service prompt: web admin system name username {password string | s e c r e t {0 | 5} string} The secret keyword encrypts the password in the router configuration. If you want to enter a plain-text password that should be converted to an M D 5 hash, use the secret 0 string command; if the password is already M D 5 hashed, use the secret 5 string command. After the initial C U E web admin account is created, the admin can create additional accounts for the customer administrator and users using the GUI. (These accounts can also be created using the CLI.) Setting Up Unity Express After it is installed in the router, the CUE module starts automatically when the router is powered on. The module will generally take longer than the router to fully boot up, and AIM modules in particular are slower to boot than NM modules. Command-line access to the C U E system is gained with the privileged exec command service-module service-engine mod/0 session. For remote access, connect to the router CLI using SSH and enter this command. The exit command returns you to the router CLI. The following are some other useful C U E commands: • offline: Takes the CUE system offline. This command will warn you that all calls will be terminated if you confirm with a "y." • restore factory default: Self-explanatory; you are prompted with a message that all configuration info and data will be irrevocably deleted. If you confirm "y," you have a factory-defaulted C U E system. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 106. Post-Installation Configuration Tool A new (or factory-defaulted) CUE system will run the Post-Installation Configuration Tool the first time you log in. IMPORTANT:: IMPORTANT:: Welcome to C i s c o Systems S e r v i c e Engine IMPORTANT:: p o s t installation configuration tool. IMPORTANT:: IMPORTANT:: T h i s i s a one t i m e p r o c e s s w h i c h w i l l g u i d e IMPORTANT:: you t h r o u g h i n i t i a l s e t u p o f y o u r S e r v i c e E n g i n e . IMPORTANT:: Once r u n , t h i s p r o c e s s w i l l have c o n f i g u r e d IMPORTANT:: t h e system f o r your l o c a t i o n . IMPORTANT:: IMPORTANT:: I f you d o not w i s h t o c o n t i n u e , t h e system w i l l b e h a l t e d IMPORTANT:: s o i t can b e s a f e l y removed f r o m t h e r o u t e r . IMPORTANT:: Do you w i s h to s t a r t configuration now (y,n)?y Are you s u r e (y,n)?y The system will now ask you a series of questions to provide the basic information needed to allow it to interact with the network and let the administrator log in: E n t e r Hostname (my-hostname, o r e n t e r t o use s e - 1 0 - 9 0 - 0 - 1 0 ) E n t e r Domain Name (mydomain.com, o r e n t e r t o use l o c a l d o m a i n ) : Using l o c a l d o m a i n a s d e f a u l t IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 107. IMPORTANT:: of IP a d d r e s s e s l i k e 1 . 1 0 0 . 1 0 . 2 0 5 f o r s e r v e r s used by CUE. In o r d e r IMPORTANT:: to c o n f i g u r e DNS you must know t h e IP address of at l e a s t one of your IMPORTANT:: DNS S e r v e r s . Would you l i k e to use DNS f o r CUE ( y , n ) ? n WARNING: If DNS is not used CUE w i l l r e q u i r e t h e use WARNING: of IP a d d r e s s e s . E n t e r IP Address of t h e P r i m a r y NTP S e r v e r (IP address,or enter to bypass):10.90.0.1 Found server 10.90.0.1 E n t e r IP Address of t h e Secondary NTP S e r v e r (IP address, or enter to bypass): The next questions set the location and time zone for the C U E system: Please i d e n t i f y a l o c a t i o n s o t h a t t i m e zone r u l e s can b e s e t c o r r e c t l y . Please s e l e c t a c o n t i n e n t o r o c e a n . © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 108. 8) B o l i v i a 25) Guyana 42) Suriname 9) B r a z i l 26) H a i t i 43) T r i n i d a d & Tobago 10) Canada 27) Honduras 44) T u r k s & Caicos Is 11) Cayman Islands 28) Jamaica 45) U n i t e d States 12) C h i l e 29) M a r t i n i q u e 46) Uruguay 13) Colombia 30) Mexico 47) Venezuela 14) Costa R i c a 31 ) M o n t s e r r a t 48) V i r g i n Islands (UK) 15) Cuba 32) N e t h e r l a n d s Antilles 49) V i r g i n Islands (US) 16) Dominica 33) N i c a r a g u a 17) Dominican Republic 34) Panama #? 45 Please s e l e c t one o f t h e f o l l o w i n g t i m e zone r e g i o n s . 1) E a s t e r n Time 2) E a s t e r n Time - M i c h i g a n - most l o c a t i o n s 3) E a s t e r n Time - Kentucky - L o u i s v i l l e a r e a 4) E a s t e r n S t a n d a r d Time - I n d i a n a - most l o c a t i o n s 5) C e n t r a l Time 6) C e n t r a l Time - M i c h i g a n - Wisconsin border 7) M o u n t a i n Time 8) M o u n t a i n Time - s o u t h Idaho & e a s t Oregon 9) M o u n t a i n Time - Navajo 10) M o u n t a i n S t a n d a r d Time - Arizona 11) P a c i f i c Time 12) A l a s k a Time 13) A l a s k a Time - A l a s k a panhandle 14) A l a s k a Time - A l a s k a panhandle neck 15) A l a s k a Time - west A l a s k a 16) A l e u t i a n Islands © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 109. 17) Hawaii #? 11 The f o l l o w i n g i n f o r m a t i o n has been g i v e n : United States Pacific Time Therefore TZ='America/Los_Angeles' w i l l b e used. L o c a l t i m e is now: Mon Apr 28 1 1 : 0 1 : 2 0 MST 2008. U n i v e r s a l Time is now: Mon Apr 28 1 7 : 0 1 : 2 0 UTC 2008. Is t h e above i n f o r m a t i o n OK? 1) Yes 2) No #? 1 C o n f i g u r i n g the system. Please w a i t . . . waiting 125 ... The next questions and answers create the administrator account and password: IMPORTANT:: IMPORTANT:: A d m i n i s t r a t o r Account C r e a t i o n IMPORTANT:: IMPORTANT:: Create an a d m i n i s t r a t o r account. With t h i s account, IMPORTANT:: you can l o g in to t h e C i s c o U n i t y Express GUI and IMPORTANT:: run t h e i n i t i a l i z a t i o n w i z a r d . IMPORTANT:: E n t e r a d m i n i s t r a t o r user ID: (user ID):UnityAdmin E n t e r password f o r : (password):Cisco © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 110. C o n f i r m password f o r b y r e e n t e r i n g i t : (password):Cisco SYSTEM ONLINE CUE> At this point, you should be able to ping the IP address given to the C U E module from the PC you intend to use to administer it. Open a supported web browser and go to http://cue_ip_address/. The first time you log in, a message displays stating that only Administrator logins are allowed (until other users have been configured on the system). There are several links to choose from; we are going to examine the Initialization Wizard. CUE Initialization Wizard The Initialization Wizard allows you to quickly set up a brand-new (or factory-defaulted) C U E system. FIGURE 12 Cue Initialization Wizard Login Screen © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 111. At the opening screen (see Figure 12), the message in red clearly indicates that the system has not been configured and that only Administrator logins are allowed. Log in with the credentials you supplied earlier. FIGURE 13 Cue Initialization Wizard Entry Screen © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 112. FIGURE 14 C i s c o CallManager Express -11 • - • 11 - > Powered bv-Cfscc Cue Initialization <6» CISCO Wizard CM Login Cisco Unity Express Initialization Wizard Screen C a l l M a n j g t r Express Login Enter trie details of the CallManager Express that Cisco Unity Express will connect to The user name and password will be used to authenticate while retrieving information from the CallManagei Express Hostname': '101 10.2 User Name *: jCisco * indicates a mandatory field : : - | Next | j Cancel | Help | The CM Express Login page lets you provide the address and credentials the CUE unit will use to contact the C M E router. This is the IP address of the service engine. FIGURE 15 Cue Initialization Wizard Import Users Screen © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 113. CUE will automatically import the users defined under the ephones in CME. You can then select whether users should have a mailbox, whether they are a voice-mail Administrator, and whether to set CFNA and CFB. FIGURE 16 Cue Initialization Wizard System Defaults Screen The next screen configures the system defaults for language, user passwords and PINs, mailbox and message max size, and message retention window. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 114. FIGURE 17 Cue Initialization Wizard Call Handling Screen The Call Handling screen defines the DNs assigned for accessing voice mail, AA and the voice-mail operator, as well as defining M W I operation. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 115. FIGURE 18 Cue Initialization Wizard Commit Screen Next, you are shown a review screen of the values you have entered so far, and you're given the option to commit the changes or go back to modify them. The final screen lists the committed information. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 116. FIGURE 19 Cue Initialization Wizard Committed Information Screen Auto Attendant The Auto Attendant (AA) is like the receptionist; a series of recorded messages and interactive prompts allows you to create an answering system that gets callers either to an individual or to a voice mailbox so they can leave a message. One advantage of having an AA is that it is then possible to free up the receptionist to do other useful tasks. An AA can deal with multiple calls at the same time. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 117. FIGURE 20 Auto Attendant List Screen From the Voice Mail menu, select Auto Attendant. This shows a list of configured AAs. Clicking the name will lead you to the configuration screens. FIGURE 21 AA Language Settings The first configuration is the language and script this AA will use. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 118. 118] FIGURE 22 AA Scripts The next screen allows you to choose the individual recordings that the script calls. It is also possible to record custom AA script recordings. FIGURE 23 AA Call Handling The Call Handling screen lets you specify the extension the system will dial to reach this AA and how many concurrent sessions the AA will support. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 119. I n t r o d u c i n g t h e C i s c o S m a r t Business Communications System The Cisco SBCS is a unified communications appliance aimed squarely at the small-business market. These all-in-one devices support data, voice, video, AA, voice mail, security, and wireless for up to 50 users. They leverage UC500 Series devices, including PoE switches, to provide the expansion capability to scale to the maximum endpoint capacity. Many connectivity modules for WAN, Internet, and PSTN options are available, and a simple-to-use graphical interface configu- ration tool makes it cost effective for small businesses to take advantage of Cisco's Unified Communications products. Hardware Components The core of the SBCS is the UC 500 Series for Small Business. This multiservice appliance incorporates routing, firewall, VPN, IPS, PoE switchports, WAN and PSTN connectivity options, and wireless options. The SBCS incorporates C M E 4.2 and C U E 3.1.1, with the features found on larger ISR hardware. The Catalyst 520 switch allows for expansion of the system to support more endpoints than the UC500 core unit supports. For more complex wireless deployments, the Cisco Mobility Express Solution with the Cisco 521 Wireless Express Access Point and the Cisco 526 Wireless Express Mobility Controller provide scalable, manageable, and secure wireless connectivity for both data and voice endpoints. The SBCS supports a wide range of Cisco IP phones, including video and wireless capabilities. Specialized applications, both from Cisco and third-party vendors, can integrate with the SBCS to further leverage the productivity gains offered by unified communications. The SBCS comes in two form factors: A desktop or wall-mount unit for installations of up to 16 users and a rack-mount unit for 32-48-user deployments; the smaller units support ISDN BRI PSTN, F X O , and FXS connections, and the larger units add support for Tl and El interfaces, both PRI and CAS. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 120. Telephony Features The SBCS supports most of the features desired in a business phone system, including the following: • PBX mode or keyswitch mode • System features • Language • Date format • System message • System speed dials • Network features • Voice V L A N • D H C P scope settings • IP addressing • SIP Trunk settings • Dial Plan settings • Extension length • Outgoing call handling • Incoming call handling • Voice-mail features • Voice-mail pilot numbers • Auto Attendant © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 121. Voice features • MOH • Paging • Intercom • Hunt Group • Call Pickup • Caller ID Blocking • Call blocking • Call Park • Conferencing • Users • Name • Association with a device • Phone • M A C address • Extension number(s) • Permissions • Call Forward Additional features are documented online. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 122. Security Features The SBCS supports the Cisco IOS firewall, Easy VPN Server and Remote, NAT, and 802. lx authentication. Wireless Features The smaller SBCS can be ordered with an integrated wireless AP, or external 521 Series wireless APs can be connected. The larger SBCS models do not support internal APs. The standalone administrative capability of the Cisco Configuration Assistant will support up to three connected APs. For support of up to 12 APs, the use of a Cisco 526 Wireless Express Mobility Controller for every 6 APs is required. The SBCS systems provide full support for wireless security, including WPA and WPA2, LEAP, PEAP, WEP, as well as voice VLANs with QoS. Cisco Configuration Assistant The C C A is a powerful and simple GUI tool for administering the UC500 Series platforms. This tool is used to deploy, configure, and maintain the SBCS devices, allowing control of the following: • Switching • Telephony • Wireless • Security • Network services • Internet connectivity The GUI tool provides a network map view, showing the devices discovered in the system, as well as a front-panel view of the SBCS system, showing ports and their status. The C C A even allows drag-and-drop upgrades to IOS software, phone firmware, and language files. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 123. CCNA Voice Quick Reference by Michael Valentine Introducing the Cisco Smart Business Communications System FIGURE 24 UC520 Cisco Configuration Assistant Topology View SEP000D29C0198C SEP0012D9FF3979 SEP001794627A1A SEP0017E06A3FCC FIGURE 25 Cisco Configuration Cisco Unified 5 0 0 Series Assistant Front Panel View For those who miss the CLI, it is still possible to do all administrative tasks from the command line if you so desire. Implementing Smart Business Communications System Voice Features The SBCS is remarkably simple to use; in fact, it ships with a default configuration that automatically assigns extensions to phones as they are plugged in, enables the device to place and receive calls on the PSTN interface, and sets up default © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 124. configurations for the firewall, wireless (if applicable), NAT, VLANs, and telephony features. This is as close to a plug- and-play phone system as it gets. Install the Cisco Configuration Assistant on your administrative PC. (The installer is available as a free download from Cisco.com.) When you run the software, it will ask for the IP address of the system to connect to; the default configura- tion gives the SBCS the IP of 192.168.10.1. C C A will autodiscover any U C 5 0 0 Series devices that are connected and generate a topology map. It is recommended, however, that you use the Device Setup Wizard to perform the initial setup, because it integrates a number of setup proce- dures that are otherwise widely dispersed throughout the application. The following steps detail how to use the Device Setup Wizard: FIGURE 26 The CCA Device Setup Wizard— Step 1 1. Select a Device: With the C C A open, choose Setup, Device Setup Wizard. From the drop-down menu, choose the device you want to configure. (Only devices in the UC500 Series will be available.) Click Next. 2. Prepare the Device: Verify that no other devices are connected; power them down or disconnect them if they are. Click Next. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 125. 3. Power Up Device: You are prompted to power up the device; if it is already powered up, click Next. 4. Connect Device to Your PC/Laptop: You must connect to one of the PoE ports with a straight-through Ethernet cable. Wait until your PC has obtained an IP address; then click Next. The C C A will verify connectivity to the device. 5. Verifying Connectivity: The CCA will contact the device and confirm connectivity to it. This may take a minute or two. 6. Hostname and User Authentication: Enter the administrator username and password. Click Next. 7. Enter Date and Time Information: You have the choice of synchronizing the time to the PC's clock or setting it manually. If you want to use N T P for the device's time synchronization, you can skip this step and configure NTP later. 8. Enter IP Address and Other Device Setup Parameters: In this screen, you select the WAN interface and can then choose to disable D H C P and set a static IP address. 9. Enter Other Device Setup Parameters: In this section, you select the Region, Phone Language, and Voicemail language as appropriate to the device's location. These settings change the ring cadence on the phones as well as the languages displayed and/or heard on the system. 1 0 . Summary: A brief summary of the configuration you have entered is displayed along with a brief caution that the update may take up to 10 minutes. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 126. FIGURE 27 The CCA Connect Window When you launch the CCA application, the Connect window appears. Here you can enter a specific community, IP address, or hostname of a device to connect to, modify options for connection port numbers, or create a new community of devices. A community is a group of SBCS devices (including 500 Series routers, 520 Series switches, wireless APs, and wireless access controllers). The devices might not be in the same physical location or logical subnet. Communities make central- ized management of a related set of devices simpler; for example, if you have several customers, each of whom has an SBCS system, you could create a community for each customer, making your administrative organization simpler. C C A Menus After connection to the device or community, you have access to the menus in the left pane. FIGURE 28 n $Q Selm The Setup Menu Device Setup Wizard.. The first menu is the Setup menu, under which is located the Device Setup Wizard detailed earlier. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 127. FIGURE 29 The Configure Menu Next is the Configure menu, which has options to configure Ports, Security, Telephony, Routing, Device Properties, and Internet Connection. You can also save the system configuration from this menu. Under Device Properties, the submenus include the following: • IP Address: Allows you to view and change the IP addresses on a device and set DNS server IPs. • Hostname: Allows you to change the hostname of a device. • System Time: Allows you to view, set, and sync the time as well as configure N T P settings on one or more devices. • H T T P Port: Allows you to change the HTTP default port the device uses. • Users and Passwords: Here you can change the administrator password on a device or on all devices simultaneously. • Device Access: Here you can set the allowed terminal protocols (Telnet, SSH, or both) that can be used to access a device. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 128. S N M P : Here you configure S N M P settings, including location and contact, traps to send, community strings, and so on. FIGURE 3 0 The Monitor Menu The Monitor menu allows you to generate reports and change the view from Front Panel to Topology. The Health link generates graphical charts showing the statistics for key performance counters. The Event Notification and System Event Messages links allow you to view and acknowledge messages and resolve problems automatically using Cisco Configuration Assistant (if possible). FIGURE 31 The Maintenance Menu The Maintenance menu gives you the ability to perform software upgrades (with drag-and-drop functionality), manage the files stored on device Flash memory, manage your configuration archive, and restart or reset devices. The license management option visible here may not be supported by the UC500 IOS in use, depending on the model. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 129. Topology View Under the Monitor menu, selecting Views, Topology generates a network map of the SBCS devices discovered or named in the community. This view allows you to annotate devices with IP addresses, port IDs, a friendly name, or a M A C address. Right-clicking or double-clicking a device allows you to view its properties or change the settings of devices; the options vary depending on the device selected. Front Panel View © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 130. Next under Views is the Front Panel View; this shows a graphical, interactive representation of the device. Interfaces are configurable by right-clicking them; you can choose to configure all ports in a module or a single one. For example, you can enable or disable the port and configure the duplex, speed, and PoE settings of an Ethernet port. Configure Menu: Telephony The Telephony menu includes the Voice configuration screen, which in turn includes several tabs. If there is an error or missing information on any page, the tab will be highlighted in red. The following explains what is found and config- urable in each tab: FIGURE 34 The Voice Device Tab • Device: The Device tab allows you to modify the hardware configuration; however, this is seldom necessary because it is autodiscovered by CCA. Here we can change the call agent from a PBX to a Key system depending on the needs of the customer. (This decision is part of the planning process and will be largely made by the customer, with advice from the designer.) This screen also lists the number of licenses (IP Phones) the unit supports. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 131. FIGURE 35 The Voice System Tab System: The System tab lets you configure region, voice-mail, and phone language settings, clock format, and system speed dials. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 132. FIGURE 36 The Voice Network Tab • N e t w o r k : This is where you configure the Voice V L A N and D H C P scope. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 133. FIGURE 37 The Voice AA & Voicemail Tab • AA & Voicemail: Here you set the extension numbers for the Auto Attendant and Voicemail, as well as their PSTN access numbers. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 134. FIGURE 38 The Voice SIP Trunk Tab • SIP Trunk: SIP trunks are used to connect to other telephony devices or service providers. The SBCS provides built-in support for AT&T and CBeyond Communications SIP trunking services, as well as generic SIP trunks for other providers. On this page you identify the SIP Proxy and Registrar servers and the M W I server, define the digest authentication username and password, and define domain information. FIGURE 39 The Voice Features Tab © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 135. Voice F e a t u r e s : In this screen, you identify the M O H audio file, enable and configure Paging, Group Pickup, Intercom, Hunt Groups, Call Park, and Conferencing. Additionally, you can configure the CallerlD Block code and the Outgoing Call Block List. FIGURE 40 The Dial Plan Tab • Dial P l a n : In the Dial Plan screen, you can adjust the number of digits per extension (the default is 3) and set the numbering plan locale to North American or Other. Choosing North American preconfigures the area codes as three- digit, the long-distance access code as 1, and the international code as O i l — t h e s e are all standardized as part of the North American Numbering Plan. Choosing Other allows you to customize the dial plan as needed for other number- ing plans worldwide. This page also allows you to configure the behavior for incoming calls; either send them to an operator or have calls on a particular FXO port sent to a specific extension. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 136. FIGURE 41 The Users Tab • U s e r s : Here you associate users with the phones discovered by CCA and add new phones as needed. You also have access to the phone configuration screen by clicking the More button. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 137. The More Screen In this screen, you can change what the phone buttons do, configure user permission, define paging group, configure intercom, and set timers and operations for busy and no-answer rules. Implementing Additional Smart Business Communications System Features The SBCS includes support for many features beyond the telephone system; it is also a router, a firewall, an Ethernet switch, a D H C P server, and optionally a wireless AP. This section will review the configuration of these elements. Port Settings From the Configure menu, select Ports, Port Settings. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 138. FIGURE 43 Port Settings Configuration The Configuration Settings tab (shown in Figure 43) allows you to enable and disable ports, set duplex and speed, and enable or disable PoE negotiation. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 139. The Runtime Status tab shows what the port is actually doing. (In contrast to the setting of Auto in the Configuration tab, here you see that ports have actually negotiated Full Duplex/100 Mbps and PoE.) At the top of the table you can see the allocated PoE, expressed as Consumed and Remaining values. The display shows Unknown, Cisco, and IEEE under the Device column; these relate to the different PoE delivery types (IEEE being the current standard, and Cisco being the prestandard proprietary implementation. Unknown typically means the attached device does not need PoE). Security Under the Security menu, you will find submenus for NAT, VPN Server, Security Audit, and Firewall and D M Z . NAT Network Address Translation serves three purposes: First, it hides internal addresses from the outside network (typically the Internet). Second, it can allow many internal addresses to access the Internet using a single, registered Internet IP. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 140. These first two capabilities are enabled by default on the SBCS. Third, it can provide selective access to internal IPO addresses from the outside in a controlled manner; this is useful for reaching mail and FTP servers from the Internet, for example. FIGURE 45 The NAT Page The NAT page allows you to configure these specific server targets, as well as firewall service configuration. VPN Server The V P N Server page lists and allows you to create the user accounts that can access the system via VPN (to a maximum of 10 concurrent sessions). You must define a preshared key, which is used in the authentication and encryption process. Next, define the IP address range that will be assigned to remote clients connecting to the system. The option of enabling Split Tunneling allows clients to use their own Internet connection for any network other than the ones listed; this is commonly used if security is less of a concern. Security Audit The Security Audit link allows you to inspect and report on the security configuration of a particular device. You are presented with a list of security checks and an indication of whether the device has passed the check; from here, you can © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 141. select one or more checks and click OK to have the C C A fix the security problem automatically. Although it is conven- ient and simple, be aware that increasing the security settings of a device may block connectivity to some applications. If this is the case, the change can also be undone in this interface, until the best course of action to both resolve the security issue and allow the intended operation can be determined. Firewall and DMZ The Firewall and D M Z page allows you to configure the basic security level (High, Medium, or Low) of the firewall to apply a preconfigured set of typical restrictions, define which interfaces are trusted and untrusted, and also to define which interface is the D M Z (Demilitarized Zone—a term that describes a screened network where certain servers and resources are placed so that controlled access to them can be provided without risking the private network). Routing Although the SBCS does not typically run dynamic routing protocols (being designed for smaller installations where such power is not required or will be handled by other devices), you do have the ability to configure static routes to ensure the device can reach remote subnets not directly connected. DHCP Configuring a D H C P server allows the SNCS to allocate IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway values to hosts on the LAN. The interface allows you to create a scope of addresses for each VLAN. (A typical system will have one VLAN for the phones and at least one more for the data devices, such as PCs.) You can also configure static D H C P bindings (so that you can predict what IP a given MAC address will be assigned) and which addresses or range of addresses will be excluded from the D H C P scope. The SBCS D H C P server is suited to the task of a small network deployment and should not be used for larger environments. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 142. Smartports FIGURE 46 Smartports The Smartports feature allows for rapid configuration of common interface settings appropriate to different device types; for example, selecting Switch or Router from the pull-down list associated with a port will activate the 802.1Q trunking protocol; selecting IP Phone + Desktop will configure multiple-VLAN functionality and QoS settings. The interface also allows you to view and set the Access (data) and Voice VLANs per port. You can also view the port configuration for the entire device by clicking its image and then clicking Details. Wireless If the SBCS is equipped with or connected to a wireless device, by selecting Configure, W L A N s you can view and change settings for the SSIDs for data and voice (for use with wireless IP Phones such as the 7920 and 7921). Selecting an SSID allows you to view and configure the wireless settings for the SSID, including the following: • B r o a d c a s t in B e a c o n : Select whether to make the SSID visible to wireless devices. • V L A N : Change the V L A N to which the SSID belongs. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 143. • Security Settings: Change from the default of no security to a setting that may include authentication, encryption, or both, using WEP, LEAP, WPA, or WPA2, among others. Internet Connection This screen allows you to view and change the settings for the WAN interface. You can enable or disable the interface, specify the use of PPPoE if your Internet provider requires it, and choose the addressing method. D H C P can be used, or if your service provider has allocated you a static IP, you can specify the IP, mask, and default gateway. If you have selected PPPoE, you can choose IP Negotiated, which relies on the negotiation capabilities of PPPoE to determine an IP address. Save Configuration This simple screen allows you to save the configuration of one or all devices to N V R A M , making it the startup configura- tion at the next reboot of the device. Maintaining a Smart Business Communications System Several tools are included in C C A to monitor and maintain the SBCS. The Monitor menu includes Reports, with links for Inventory and VPN Status; Views, with links to Front Panel and Topology (discussed previously), Health; Event Notification; and System Messages. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 144. Health FIGURE 47 The Health Display Under the Monitor menu, select Health. This generates a graphical representation (shown in Figure 47) of the critical general health statistics of the SBCS: Bandwidth Utilization, Packet Error Rate, PoE Utilization, Temperature, CPU Utilization, and Memory Utilization. These stats are updated every minute. More information can be read in the Health Details window, accessed by clicking the Details button. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 145. Event Notification CCA allows you to view Event logs for all devices in your network, with easy-to-read severity icons to quickly indicate whether the event is serious or informational: • Critical errors are marked as Level 0 and 1. • Errors are marked as Level 2 or 3. • Warnings are marked as Level 4. • Informational events are marked as Level 5, 6, or 7. The Filter button allows you to view only messages of the selected level(s). The icons for these messages are shown next: FIGURE 48 Event Monitor The Event Notification window allows you to acknowledge event notifications, tell CCA to take action where possible, and turn off the Alert LED on SBCS switches. System Messages This screen allows you to view system messages from all devices or any single device and apply filters for severity level, if desired. These messages are the same that can be seen at the terminal monitor of the IOS CLI. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 146. Backup and Restore From the Maintenance menu, choose Configuration Archive. The window displays the Backup tab and the Restore tab. To back up, select All Devices or just a single device. Add a descriptive note for future reference, make note of the backup path, and click Back Up. The files are written to the C: o u e t and Settings<user n m > .configuration D c m ns a e assistants b c u s directory by default; by selecting the Preferences button, you can change the directory and choose akp to save the configuration to the device before backing it up. The Restore tab allows you to select your view of backed-up configurations: • Show backed-up configurations of the selected device • Show backed-up configurations of the selected device type • Show all backed-up configurations Choose a device to restore, select a backup file, note any descriptive comments, and click Restore. Restart/Reset Under the Maintenance menu, the next link is Restart/Reset. This allows you to reboot the chosen device and gives you the option of resetting it to factory defaults if need be. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 147. [ 147] cannot attest to the accuracy of this information. Use of a term in this digital Short Cut should not be regarded as CCNA Voice Quick Reference affecting the validity of any trademark or service mark. Michael Valentine Feedback Information Copyright © 2008 Cisco Systems, Inc. At Cisco Press, our goal is to create in-depth technical books of the highest quality and value. Each book is crafted Published by: with care and precision, undergoing rigorous development that involves the unique expertise of members of the Cisco Press professional technical community. 800 East 96th Street Reader feedback is a natural continuation of this process. If you have any comments on how we could improve the Indianapolis, Indiana 46240 USA quality of this digital Short Cut or otherwise alter it to better suit your needs, you can contact us through email at All rights reserved. No part of this digital Short Cut may be reproduced or transmit- feedback@ciscopress.com. Please be sure to include the digital Short Cut title and ISBN in your message. ted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, We greatly appreciate your assistance. recording, or by any information storage and retrieval system, without written permission from the publisher, except for the inclusion of brief quotations in a review. Corporate and Government Sales First Release June 2008 The publisher offers excellent discounts on this digital Short Cut when ordered in quantity for bulk purchases or special sales, which may include electronic versions and/or custom covers and content particular to your business, ISBN-13: 978-1-58705-767-0 training goals, marketing focus, and branding interests. For more information, please contact: U.S. Corporate and ISBN-10: 1-58705-767-0 Government Sales 1-800-382-3419 corpsales@pearsontechgroup.com. For sales outside the United States please contact: International Sales international@pearsoned.com Warning and Disclaimer This digital Short Cut is designed to provide information about networking. Every Americas Headquarters Asia Pacific Headquarters Europe Headquarters effort has been made to make this digital Short Cut as complete and accurate as Cisco Systems, Inc. Cisco Systems. Inc. Cisco Systems International BV 170 West Tasman Drive 168 Robinson Road Haarler berg park possible, but no warranty or fitness is implied. San Jose. CA 95134-1706 #28-01 Capital Tower Haarlerbergweg 13-19 USA Singapore068912 1101 CHAmsterdam The information is provided on an "as is" basis. The authors, Cisco Press, and Cisco www.cisco.com wwwcisco.com The Netherlands Tel: 408 526-4000 Tel: +65 6317 7777 www-europe.cisco.com Systems, Inc. shall have neither liability nor responsibility to any person or entity 800 553-NETS (6387) Fax:+65 6317 7799 Tel:+31 0 800 020 0791 Fax:408 527-0883 Fax:+31 0 2 0 3 5 7 1100 with respect to any loss or damages arising from the information contained in this Cisco has more than 200 offices worldwide. Addresses, phone numbers, and fax numbers are listed on the Cisco website at www.cisco.com/go/offices, digital Short Cut. ©2007 Cisco Systems. Inc. All rights reserved. CCVR the Cisco logo, and the Cisco Square Bridge logo are trademarks of Cisco Systems. Inc: Changing the Way We Work. Live, Play, and Learn is a service mark of Cisco The opinions expressed in this digital Short Cut belong to the authors and are not Systems, Inc.; and Access Registrar. Aironet, BPX. Catalyst. CCDA, CCDR CCIE, CCIP. CCNA, CCNR CCSP Cisco, the Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert logo, Cisco IOS, Cisco Press, Cisco Systems. Cisco Systems Capital, the Cisco Systems logo, Cisco Unity, Enterprise/Solver, Ether Channel, EtherFast, EtherSwitch. Fast Step. Follow Me Browsing, FormShare. GigaDrive, GigaStack. HomeLink, Internet Quotient, IOS, iPhone, IP/TV. iQ Expertise, the necessarily those of Cisco Systems, Inc. iQ logo. iQ Net Readiness Scorecard. iQuick Study. LightStream. Linksys. Meeting Place. MGX. Networking Academy. Network Registrar Packet. PIX. ProConnect. RateMUX. ScriptShare SlideCast. SMARTnet, StackWise. The Fastest Way to Increase Your Internet Quotient, and TransPath are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc and/or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries. Trademark Acknowledgments All other trademarks mentioned in this document or Website are the property of their respective owners The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company (0701R] All terms mentioned in this digital Short Cut that are known to be trademarks or service marks have been appropriately capitalized. Cisco Press or Cisco Systems, Inc. © 2008 Cisco Systems Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright. Please see page 147 for more details.
  • 148. > Safari Library Subscribe Now! http://safari.ciscopress.com/library Safari's entire technology collection is now available with no restrictions. Imagine the value of being able to search and access thousands of books, videos, and articles from leading technology authors whenever you wish. EXPLORE TOPICS MORE FULLY Gain a m o r e robust u n d e r s t a n d i n g of r e l a t e d issues by using Safari as your r e s e a r c h t o o l . With Safari L i b r a r y you can leverage the k n o w l e d g e of the w o r l d ' s t e c h n o l o g y g u r u s . For one flat, m o n t h l y fee, y o u ' l l have u n r e s t r i c t e d access to a r e f e r e n c e collection offered n o w h e r e else in the w o r l d — a l l at y o u r f i n g e r t i p s . With a Safari Library s u b s c r i p t i o n , y o u ' l l get the f o l l o w i n g p r e m i u m services: • ^ I m m e d i a t e access to the newest, c u t t i n g - e d g e b o o k s — A p p r o x i m a t e l y eighty new titles are added per m o n t h in conjunction w i t h , or in advance of, t h e i r print publication. ' • ^ C h a p t e r d o w n l o a d s — D o w n l o a d five c h a p t e r s per m o n t h so you can w o r k offline w h e n you need to. Rough Cuts—A service that provides online access to p r e p u b l i c a t i o n i n f o r m a t i o n on advanced t e c h n o l o g i e s . Content is updated as the a u t h o r w r i t e s the book. You canalso download Rough Cuts for offline r e f e r e n c e V i d e o s — P r e m i e r design and d e v e l o p m e n t videos f r o m t r a i n i n g and e - l e a r n i n g expert lynda.com and o t h e r p u b l i s h e r s you t r u s t . ' • ^ C u t and paste code—Cut and paste code directly f r o m Safari. Save time. Eliminate errors. • • ^ S a v e up to 35% on print books—Safari S u b s c r i b e r s receive a discount of up to 35% on p u b l i s h e r s ' print books.